Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Review"

See other formats


C ( <. 


jr  >•  > 

• - ' C c 
* .c  ;C  c 
< V < C 
- t c r\  < 


iFrmtt  tljp  IGibrary  of 

Prnfpsaor  Itenjamitt  IBmktnndgp  Marftplfo 
$lrqupatkr&  bo  IttH*  to 
Ihp  library  of 

Priarptnn  ©fjpnlogiral  ^>pmtttary 

A-l.9^ 

A 1 4 


< < « <. 

cc 

C_  <} 

<■  C 

< «-  < 

« « % 

< « < 

* « c 

«■  < 

M 


< • ■ ' 

cr  < 

■ > <Ki 

■ C c-  , 


<-vr 

-Cc 


l r+rf 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/princetonreview5818unse 


THE 


APR  12  1924 
^iOGl CAL 


R I N C ETO  N 


REVIEW. 


33g  ®23f)om,  all  tijuifls ; for  2Mom,  all  tijtnfls. 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  YEAR. 


J AN  U ARY  — j UN  E. 


I 


NEW  YORK. 
1882. 


JANUARY. 


nsi 

FUTURE  PAPER  A.ONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY  ....  i 
Prof.  Lyman  H.  Atwater,  Princeton  College 

THE  MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN  . 26 

G.  Stanley  Hall,  Ph.D.,  Cambridge 

THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY 49 

President  James  McCosh 

THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART 72 

John  F.  Weir,  N.A.,  School  of  the  Fine  Arts,  Yale  College 

ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT  ...  85 

Eugene  Smith 

THE  PLACE  OF  PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CUR- 
RICULUM   103 

Francis  L.  Patton,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


MARCH. 

THE  PRIVATE  OWNERSHIP  OF  LAND 125 

J.  M.  Sturtevant,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

MODERN  /ESTHETICISM  ' . 148 

Prof.  Theodore  W.  Hunt,  Ph.D.,  Princeton  College 

THE  COLLAPSE  OF  FAITH 164 

President  Noah  Porter,  Yale  College 


A 


PACK 

PATRONAGE  MONOPOLY  AND  THE  PENDLETON  BILL  . 185 

Dorman  B.  Eaton,  LL.D.,  New  York 

PHILOSOPHY  AND  ITS  SPECIFIC  PROBLEMS 208 

George  S.  Morris,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 

EVOLUTION  IN  EDUCATION ,233 

Principal  Dawson,  LL.D.,  F.R.S. 


MAY. 

AMERICAN  AGRICULTURE  ....  ....  249 

Francis  A.  Walker,  Late  Superintendent  of  the  Tenth  Census 

RIGHT  AND  WRONG  IN  POLITICS 265 

Sheldon  Amos,  LL.D.,  University  College,  London 

ORTHODOX  RATIONALISM 294 

Newman  Smyth,  D.D. 

THE  PAINTER’S  ART 313 

John  F.  Weir,  N.A.,  Yale  School  of  the  Fine  Arts 

CHURCH  ECONOMICS 325 

Rev.  Dr.  John  Hall,  New  York 

THE  COLLAPSE  OF  FAITH 339 


President  Noah  Porter,  D.D.,  LL.D. 


JULY, 


PAGE 

WAGES,  PRICES  AND  PROFITS i 

Hon.  Carroll  D.  Wright 

THE  PERSONALITY  OF  GOD  AND  OF  MAN  ....  16 

George  P.  Fisher,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

POLYGAMY  IN  NEW  ENGLAND  . 39 

Leonard  Woolsey  Bacon 

RATIONALITY,  ACTIVITY  AND  FAITH 58 

Professor  William  James,  Harvard  College 

THE  NEW  IRISH  LAND  LAW 87 

Professor  King,  Lafayette  College 

PROPOSED  REFORMS  IN  COLLEGIATE  EDUCATION  . . 100 

Lyman  H.  Atwater,  Princeton  College 


1 

SEPTEMBER. 

CAN  AMERICANS  COMPETE  IN  THE  OCEAN  CARRYING 

TRADE? 1 21 

George  F.  Seward 

THE  FUTURE  OF  TURKEY  ...  ....  133 

Canon  George  Rawlinson,  University  of  Oxford  ' 

THE  DOCTRINE  OF  THE  TRINITY  IN  THE  LIGHT  OF 

RECENT  PSYCHOLOGY 156 


Henry  N.  Day,  D.D. 


PAGB 

PERSONALTY  AND  LAW— THE  DUKE  OF  ARGYLL  iSo 

Mark  Hopkins,  Ex-President  of  Williams  College 

CO-OPERATION  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  ....  201 

R.  Heber  Newton 

THE  DAWN  OF  THE  ENGLISH  REFORMATION  ...  215 

James  E.  Tiiorold  Rogers,  M.P.,  London 


NOVEMBER. 

WAGES 241 

William  G.  Sumner,  Yale  College 

THE  THEOLOGICAL  RENAISSANCE ‘OF  THE  NINETEENTH 

CENTURY 263 

Professor  Allen,  of  the  Cambridge  Episcopal  School 

GREAT  BRITAIN,  AMERICA  AND.  IRELAND  ....  283 

Goldwin  Smith,  D.C.L. 

THE  EDUCATION  OF  THE  WILL 306 

G.  Stanley  Hall,  Ph.D. 

THE  SCOTTISH  PHILOSOPHY  AS  CONTRASTED  WITH  THE 

GERMAN 326 

President  James  McCosh,  Princeton  College 
TARIFF  REVISION 345 


David  A.  Wells,  LL.D.,  D.C.L. 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


HE  people  of  this  country  want  a sound  paper  currency, 


in  a supply  as  ample  as  consists  with  its  soundness  and 
instant  convertibility  into  coin  for  its  face.  If  there  were  no 
stronger  reason  for  this,  the  habit  of  using  it  has  mastered  them. 

This  habit,  however,  is  due  to  reasons  which  are  intrinsic 
and  weighty.  They  will  insure  its  general  use  in  the  long-run, 
all  demonstrations  of  doctrinaires  to  the  contrary  notwithstand- 
ing. It  is  far  safer  and  more  convenient  than  coin,  even  if  it 
be  gold,  which  is  some  sixteen  times  more  convenient  than  sil- 
ver, except  for  fractional  currency.  If  lost  or  destroyed,  there 
is  no  absolute  destruction  of  property.  A piece  of  paper  has 
been  lost ; the  coin  constituting  the  real  value  represented  by  it 
remains.  The  title  to  it  has  indeed  gone  from  the  loser  of  the 
bank  or  Treasury  note,  but  it  remains  in  the  hands  of  the  bank 
or  government,  whose  paper  note,  now  lost,  promised  to  pay  it  on 
demand.  There  is  no  destruction  of  value,  but  only  a transfer 
of  its  ownership.  Moreover,  the  loss  from  wear  and  tear  and 
replacement  of  paper  money  is  infinitesimal.  That  from  the 
necessary  abrasion  as  well  as  the  clipping,  punching,  and  sweat- 
ing of  coin  in  constant  use  would  be  very  onerous,  as  all  his- 
tory, especially  the  state  of  English  coin  before  the  establish- 
ment of  the  Bank  of  England,  and  of  the  old  Mexican  coins  not 
long  ago  current  in  this  country,  abundantly  proves.  Nay,  aside 
of  all  wear  and  other  loss,  the  simple  cost  of  the  necessary  coin 
to  take  the  place  of  its  present  paper  substitutes  would  be  enor- 
mous ; likewise  the  cost  of  handling  and  guarding  it.  The  quan- 
tity required  for  the  purpose  would  be  immense ; the  cost  of 
exchange,  and  by  consequence  of  the  articles  exchanged,  would 
thus  be  much  enhanced.  Prices  would  rise  enormously  even 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


2 

measured  by  a metallic  currency,  and,  in  the  face  of  a common 
impression  to  the  contrary,  vastly  beyond  the  standard  reached 
under  the  use  of  our  present  convertible  paper  substitutes  for 
coin.  The  coin  now  used  is  little  more  than  infinitesimal  in 
proportion  to  the  paper  substitutes  for  it  employed  in  exchange. 
It  is  simply  enough  to  serve  as  a measure  of  value,  and  bears 
somewhat  the  proportion  to  the  notes,  checks,  and  bills  of  ex- 
change actually  discharging  the  function  of  money  in  trade, 
which  the  standard  weights  and  measures  of  commerce  bear 
to  the  articles  whose  quantity  they  are  used  to  ascertain.  The 
paper  presented  by  Controller  Knox  at  the  recent  Bankers’ 
Convention  at  Niagara  Falls  shows  that  the  responses  of  1966 
out  of  2106  national  banks  to  inquiries  made  by  him  proved, 
that  “the  relative  proportion  of  gold  coin  received  was  0.65,  of 
silver  coin  0.16,  of  paper  currency  4.06,  and  of  checks  and  drafts 
95.13  while  at  the  banks  in  New  York  City  the  proportions 
were:  gold  coin  0.27,  silver  0.01,  paper  currency  1.02,  checks, 
drafts,  etc.,  98.70  per  cent.  At  Sir  John  Lubbock’s  bank  in 
London  it  was  ascertained  that  the  proportion  of  the  different 
items  received  in  payment  for  a certain  period  was  : checks  and 
bills  96.8  per  cent,  Bank  of  England  notes  2.2,  country-bank 
notes  0.4,  coin  0.6.  Mr.  Knox  also  testifies : “ The  people 
throughout  the  country  everywhere  ask  for  paper,  and  the 
banks  find  difficulty  in  ^applying  the  demand,  and  a like  diffi- 
culty in  inducing  their  dealers  to  accept  coin  in  payment.  The 
Clearing-House  vault  in  New  York  is  full  to  overflowing.” 

This  too  demonstrates  that  the  coin  ordinarily  used  in  com- 
merce is  barely  enough  to  serve  as  the  yard-stick  to  determine 
the  value  represented  by  the  paper  instruments  convertible  into 
it  which  are  actually  employed.  It  further  confirms  the  view 
of  such  writers  on  economics  as  J.  S.  Mill,  that  bank  notes  or 
paper  money,  so  long  as  convertible , perform  a very  subordinate 
part  in  inflating  that  bubble  of  baseless  credit  which  is  the  pro- 
lific cause  of  financial  convulsions  and  panics.  The  loans  of 
banks  against  which  checks  can  be  drawn,  having  all  the  power 
not  only  of  paper  but  of  metallic  money  between  those  who 
respectively  draw  and  accept  them,  are  twenty  times  the  amount 
of  the  paper  money,  indeed  all  money,  used  in  the  liquidation 
of  debts  and  the  exchange  of  commodities.  To  this  source,  far 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


3 


more  than  any  unhealthy  expansion  of  mere  currency  kept  re- 
deemable for  its  face,  is  to  be  attributed  the  inflation  which 
portends  and  causes  commercial  panics.  Whether  a bank  issue 
its  credit  in  the  form  of  circulating  notes,  or  deposits  to  the 
credit  of  its  borrowers,  against  bills  discounted,  to  be  drawn 
against  by  check,  matters  not.  Depositors  as  well  as  bill-hold- 
ers can  demand  specie.  The  real  question  is,  whether  it  has 
loaned  its  credit  to  those  having  means,  present  or  prospective, 
to  pay  these  bills  at  maturity.  If  so,  all  is  well.  If  otherwise, 
on  any  large  scale,  disaster  will  come  to  the  bank  or  banks  thus 
issuing  baseless  credits,  and  to  the  whole  mercantile  community, 
and  others  involved  with  them.  This  is  the  true  secret  of  com- 
mercial panics : baseless  credit  given  on  a large  scale  to  prop 
unproductive  enterprises  or  extravagant  living  which  consumes 
without  producing.  It  may,  as  the  last  great  commercial  panic 
did,  begin  with  the'  fall  of  great  banking  houses  that  have  loaned 
their  means  imprudently,  and  in  their  own  downfall  have  shaken 
the  banks  that  have  sustained  them  by  loans.  The  notion  that  a 
plentiful  supply  of  bank  notes,  constituting  less  than  a twentieth 
of  the  actual  medium  of  exchange,  so  long  as  they  are  kept  con- 
vertible into  coin,  can  cause  any  considerable  and  permanently 
dangerous  inflation  of  prices  and  consequent  speculation  is 
groundless.  The  moment  prices  are  raised  abnormally  in  this 
way,  importations  will  come  in  from  foreign  countries  to  reap 
these  high  prices.  Foreigners  will  require  these  bank  notes  to 
be  converted  into  coin,  and  the  requisite  contraction  will  quickly 
come  about,  especially  in  these  days  of  telegraphs  and  steam- 
ships. An  inconvertible  currency  is  another  thing,  and  oper- 
ates on  the  reverse  principle. 

Most  standard  political  economists  and  bullionists  from 
Adam  Smith  down  have  maintained  that,  if  an  inconvertible 
paper  currency  made  legal  tender  could  be  kept  down  to  the 
amount  of  coin  that  would  circulate  in  its  place,  were  there  no 
paper  money,  it  would  have  precisely  the  same  value.  It  is  sel- 
dom that  a fallacy  so  gross  has  shown  such  vitality.  The  idea 
that  bits  of  paper  without  intrinsic  value,  and  inconvertible  into 
coin,  because  armed  by  despotic  authority  with  the  power  to 
wipe  out  debts,  can  have  the  same  value  or  fulfil  the  same 
functions  as  coin  or  its  representative — coin  salable  in  the  mar- 


4 


THE  PRINCE  TON  RE  VIE  W. 


kets  of  the  world  for  its  face  value  when  it  goes  out  of  use  as 
money — is  preposterous.  Such  government  notes  have  pre- 

cisely the  same  value  as  stay-law  certificates,  which  they  are  in 
fact.  All  other  money  functions  or  purchasing  power  in  them 
are  simply  derivative  from  this.  Their  value  is  in  the  main 
regulated  by  the  prospect  of  their  redemption  as  respects  the 
fact,  degree,  and  time  of  it.  This  was  shown  abundantly  dur- 
ing and  after  our  last  war,  in  which  their  gold  price  fluctuated 
from  38  to  100  cents  on  the  dollar,  and  often  several  per  cent 
in  a day,  according  as  the  fluctuating  phases  of  the  war  affected 
the  prospect  of  their  redemption.  Would  this  have  been  pos- 
sible in  respect  to  gold  and  silver  or  their  representatives  ? 

It  is  a notable  fact  that  the  panicky  element,  always  an  un- 
avoidable, tho  in  one  sense  needless,  secondary  aggravation  of 
commercial  crises,  which  leads  to  the  locking  up  of  money  in 
hoards  beyond  the  reach  of  solvent  borrowers,  through  fear  that 
its  possessors  may  not  be  able  to  command  it  when  they  want 
it,  is  usually  quieted  by  some  device  which  brings  into  use  some 
temporary  substitute  for  the  regular  currency,  and  not  subject 
to  its  legal  limitations.  This  stops  the  panic  by  providing  for 
the  supply  of  the  needs  of  solvent  borrowers  irrespective  of  the 
lawful  money  kept  in  inaccessible  hoards  for  the  time  being. 
Then  the  lawful  money  itself  comes  out  of  its  concealment, 
seeking  good  borrowers  and  profitable  investment.  This  after- 
ward, so  far  from  continuing  scarce,  often  becomes  a drug. 
Panics  have  been  repeatedly  arrested  or  prevented  in  London 
by  an  order  in  council  removing  for  a time  the  limitation 
upon  the  issues  of  the  Bank  of  England  imposed  by  its  last 
charter.  As  soon  as  the  merchants  found  the  money  could 
be  had,  they  did  not  want  it.  By  a temporary  suspension  of 
specie  payments  in  this  country  in  1857  the  needed  inferior  cur- 
rency was  supplied,  which  dissolved  the  panic  and  restored  coin 
payments  in  six  months.  In  1873  the  “lawful  money”  seques- 
tered by  the  panic  was  not  specie-paying;  consequently  certain 
“ bank  certificates”  were  devised  to  take  their  place  temporarily. 
These  dissolved  the  panic,  and  “ lawful  money”  soon  returned 
to  its  normal  channels  of  circulation. 

In  discussing  the  paper  money  of  the  future  it  may  be  as- 
sumed: I.  That  no  better  was  ever  devised  than  that  of  our 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


5 


present  national  banks  secured  by  national  stocks ; 2.  That  it 
is  the  national  will  steadily  to  reduce  and  speedily  extinguish 
the  public  debt,  so  that  the  very  basis  and  possibility  of  such 
a currency  will  steadily  be  passing  away;  3.  The  question  What 
is  the  best  circulating  medium  to  supply  the  vacuum?  is  more 
concrete  than  abstract ; not  merely  what  is  ideally  the  best,  if 
the  people  could  be  persuaded  to  adopt  it,  but  what  is  the  best 
that,  with  their  predilections,  traditions,  and  prejudices,  they 
can  probably  be  induced  to  adopt. 

The  practical  alternatives  are  national  Treasury  legal-ten- 
der notes;  national-bank  notes  secured  as  best  they  may  be  by 
other  means  than  United  States  stocks;  the  system  of  State- 
bank  circulation  ; the  currency  provided  by  some  great  over- 
shadowing national  bank  and  its  branches,  concurrently  with 
the  circulating  notes  of  State  banks,  which  prevailed  through 
most  of  the  first  half-century  of  our  national  history. 

Some  say,  indeed,  the  State  is  under  no  obligation  to  pro- 
tect the  people  against  issues  of  worthless  money,  and  that  the 
principle  of  caveat  emptor  applies  here  as  well  as  elsewhere.  Bank 
bills,  however,  circulate  as  money  only  in  virtue  of  being  issued 
by  public  institutions  founded  and  authorized  by  government. 
It  is  the  duty  of  government  to  make  the  best  practicable  pro- 
vision that  what  thus  is  made  current  as  money  by  its  own 
virtual  imprimatur , be  good  for  its  face,  whether  paper  or 
coin,  and  to  suppress  all  counterfeit,  unsound,  and  fraudulent 
issues.  These  operate  as  a fraud  upon  innocent  holders.  They 
destroy  the  very  standards  of  value  and  instruments  of  honor- 
able trade.  If  the  State  abdicates  this  function,  there  will  be 
no  end  of  schemes  and  institutions  for  creating  property,  or 
rather  filching  it  from  the  people,  by  issuing  engraved  paper 
dollars  worth  less  than  the  paper  on  which  they  are  inscribed, 
in  exchange  for  it.  Conscience  and  the  Bible  alike  pronounce 
“ a false  balance  an  abomination  to  the  Lord.”  Spurious  money 
is  the  worst  form  of  this  sort  of  imposture. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  treat  of  the  different  kinds  of  paper 
money  which  may  take  the  place  of  the  national-bank  notes 
now  secured  by  the  deposit  of  government  stocks  in  the  na- 
tional Treasury,  in  the  event  of  these  being  retired  by  the  pay- 
ment of  the  national  debt  or  otherwise,  in  an  order  the  reverse 


6 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  W. 


of  that  in  which  they  respectively  succeeded  each  other  in  the 
past. 

i.  The  only  paper  currency  left  us,  without  further  legisla- 
tion, on  the  extinction  of  national-bank  notes,  would  be  the 
legal-tender  notes  of  the  national  Treasury,  in  which  the  former 
are  now  legally  redeemable.  These  could  be  multiplied  indefi- 
nitely for  the  simple  cost  of  engraving  by  the  national  Treasury. 
If  adequate  provision  both  could  and  would  be  made  to  insure 
their  redemption  in  gold  or  equivalent  silver,  in  every  emergency- 
short  of  revolution,  they  would  form  the  best  conceivable  cur- 
rency. It  would  be  the  equal  of  coin  without  discount  in  every 
corner  of  our  country,  and  in  foreign  countries  even,  to  an 
extent  not  easily  foreseen.  The  profit,  whatever  it  might  be, 
would  belong  to  the  people.  This,  however,  is  of  small  moment 
when  balanced  against  its  soundness  and  redeemability  at  what- 
ever cost,  in  order  both  to  preserve  the  national  faith  inviolate, 
and  prevent  the  moral  and  commercial  plague  of  inconvertible 
legal-tender  paper  money  among  a people.  Still,  to  the  full 
extent  to  which  government  keeps  in  circulation  its  own  notes 
without  interest,  in  excess  of  the  amount  of  coin  necessary  to 
be  kept  on  hand  for  their  redemption,  and  the  other  expenses 
of  maintaining  it,  it  gains  a gratuitous  loan  from  the  people. 
The  real  net  profit  of  this,  after  all  expenses,  at  the  present  low 
rates  of  interest  on  government  loans  is  not  large.  It  includes, 
however,  in  addition,  the  slight  gain  arising  from  the  loss  or 
destruction  of  these  notes  in  any  hands  but  its  own. 

Two  questions  arise  at  this  point : (i)  Whether  it  could,  and 
(2)  Whether  it  would  if  it  could,  keep  them  redeemable  in  all 
emergencies  short  of  some  social  or  political  upheaval  equiva- 
lent to  revolution,  and  in  the  amount  required  for  the  public 
welfare,  neither  more  nor  less? 

That  it  can  do  this  is  beyond  all  doubt.  Even  on  the  sever- 
est estimate,  that  its  coin  reserve  must  be  fully  equal  to  its 
paper  promises  to  pay  on  demand,  and  that  it  must  have  a gold 
eagle  in  its  vaults  for  every  paper  eagle  on  the  wing,  it  is  super- 
abundantly able  to  do  it.  The  paper  currency  of  the  country, 
adding  the  government  legal  tender  to  the  national-bank  notes, 
amounts  in  round  numbers  to  $700,000,000.  Government  could 
easily  command  this  by  the  issue  of  3-  to  4-per-cent  bonds  to 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


7 


procure  whatever  coin  or  bullion  is  necessary,  in  addition  to  its 
ordinary  specie  reserve,  to  make  up  this  sum.  For  this  it  would 
be  reimbursed  by  an  equal  value  of  its  convertible  notes  in  pay- 
ing its  obligations  and  debts  of  whatever  kind.  But  the  govern- 
ment can  provide  for  the  redemption  of  its  notes  on  far  better 
terms.  Gold  coin  of  two  fifths  the  amount  of  the  bills  issued 
would  be  ample  in  all  normal,  and  most  abnormal,  conditions  to 
secure  their  redemption  on  presentation.1  The  gold  would 
rarely  be  wanted  for  the  paper,  except  to  settle  adverse  foreign 
balances,  as  long  as  the  bill-holder  is  sure  he  can  have  it  if  he 
wishes  it.  And  the  people  of  the  country,  if  it  is  their  will  to 
have  a specie-paying  currency,  never  will  fear  that  the  notes  of 
their  government  will  be  dishonored. 

But  if  in  any  monetary  convulsion  panic  should  arise,  even 
with  respect  to  government  redeeming  its  notes,  the  emergency 
can  be  met  at  once  by  issuing  short-term  bonds  for  the  gold 
at  such  rate  of  interest  as  will  certainly  command  it,  and  draw 
it  from  the  hoards  which  will  readily  yield  it  up  for  such  golden 
securities.  This  is  the  normal  and  effectual  way,  as  all  history 
shows,  of  commanding  the  means  to  meet 'extraordinary  emer- 
gencies. The  mere  fact  of  its  being  known  that  it  could  and 
would  be  resorted  to  in  case  of  necessity  would  rarely  fail  to 
prevent  such  necessity.  Except  for  meeting  foreign  adverse 
balances,  the  known  fact  that  in  any  event  the  government 
could  and  would  provide  for  their  redemption,  would  prevent 
their  being  presented  for  redemption.  This  was  well  illustrated 
by  the  effect  of  the  44-per-cent  loan  which  Secretary  Sherman 
was  authorized  to  make,  and  did  make,  in  aid  of  the  resumption 
of  specie  payments.  It  not  only  accelerated  and  insured  this 
at  the  time  fixed  by  law,  but  virtually  effected  it  considerably 
in  advance  of  that  time,  and  in  a way  vastly  more  propitious  to 
the  public  interest  than  any  attempt  to  compass  the  same  end 

1 U.  S.  Treasurer  Gilfillan  in  his  recent  report  pronounces  a specie  reserve  of 
40  per  cent,  or  two  fifths  the  amount  of  all  immediate  liabilities  of  the  Treasury, 
ample  to  protect  them.  At  present  it  holds  this  proportion  of  specie ‘reserve  to 
its  legal-tender  notes,  and  the  full  amount  of  the  face  of  its  gold  and  silver  certi- 
ficates in  coin  of  each  kind  respectively,  thus  making  the  proportion  of  entire 
coin  reserve  to  immediate  liabilities  over  51  per  cent — about  $64,000,000,  or, 
exclusive  of  fractional  coin,  $38,000,000  in  excess  of  an  ample  coin  reserve  to  pro- 
tect all  immediate  obligations. 


8 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


by  contracting  the  currency — a process  far  more  stringent  and 
disturbing  than  that  of  raising  it  towards  par  by  accumulating 
coin  for  its  redemption.  There  can  be  no  doubt,  then,  of  the 
ability  of  the  national  government  to  provide  a sound  paper 
currency,  good  always  and  everywhere  for  its  face  in  gold,  and 
everywhere  preferred  to  it,  with  rare  exceptions,  with  equal 
profit  to  itself  and  advantage  to  the  people.  But  if  it  under- 
takes this  function,  will  it  take  the  necessary  means  to  make 
and  keep  it  always  sound  and  convertible? 

It  must  be  confessed  that  here  is  where  this  scheme  labors. 
Once  it  is  recognized  as  the  function  of  government  to  create 
money  by  engraving  paper  and  making  it  legal  tender  whether 
convertible  or  not,  and  there  is  no  end  of  the  temptations  on 
every  hand  to  repudiate  the  obligation  to  redeem  it,  nay,  to 
issue  it,  in  such  quantities  as  to  necessitate  its  being  irredeem- 
able, in  furtherance  of  all  sorts  of  jobs  by  which  all  sections 
seek  to  drain  the  public  treasury  for  their  own  benefit,  or  for 
the  behoof  of  political  parties  and  the  cormorants  who  fatten 
upon  them.  No  doubt  a sound  and  conservative  sentiment 
will  be  strong  enough  to  oppose  and  possibly  defeat  such  a 
breach  of  national  faith,  and  debasement  of  the  very  measures 
of  value  and  standards  of  honesty.  But  it  is  by  no  means 
certain  to  prevail.  Of  that  we  have  had  painfully  convincing 
evidence  in  the  long  and  severe  contest  for  the  resumption  of 
specie  payments,  which  more  than  once  only  escaped  failure  by 
the  narrowest,  and  by  the  aid  of  the  most  adroit  parliamentary 
tactics  or  hair-breadth  technicalities — thus  proving  too  clearly 
that  the  heart  of  the  people,  or  enough  of  them  to  sway  great 
parties,  was  joined  to  these  paper  idols  and  would  not  let  them 
alone.  These  irredeemablc-paper-money  factions  are  even  now 
courting  and  courted  by  political  parties.  When  these  are 
pretty  evenly  balanced,  they  become  the  make-weights  to  give 
the  preponderance  to  that  with  which  they  can  make  the  best 
terms.  They  are  possessed  with  the  delusion  that  value  can  be 
indefinitely  created  by  the  fiat  of  the  government  making  paper 
stamped  with  the  word  “ dollar”  equal  to  24^  grains  of  gold 
stamped  likewise ; and  that  so  it  has  only  to  make  the  decree, 
and  it  will  thus  make  itself  rich,  the  people  prosperous,  and 
wealth  abundant,  by  engraved  pieces  of  paper. 


FUTURE  RATER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


9 


The  recent  action  of  the  government  with  regard  to  silver 
dollars  shows  a less  gross,  but  none  the  less  real,  form  of  the 
same  delusion,  still  dominant  in  Congress  and  the  national  gov- 
ernment. As  we  now  write,  the  silver  dollar  of  412^  grains  is 
worth  in  the  markets  of  the  world  .8701  of  the  gold  dollar  of 
the  United  States.  Yet  it  is  made  a legal  tender  for  debt  of 
every  kind  by  congressional  enactment  for  an  amount  precisely 
equal  to  the  gold  dollar.  Congress,  which  herein  is  presumed 
to  express  the  will  of  the  nation,  not  only  ordains  this  equality 
of  debt-paying  power  between  the  gold  dollar  and  the  silver 
dollar  to-day  worth  less  than  f of  it,  but  further  requires  the 
continued  coinage  of  at  least  some  twenty-five  millions  of  these 
depreciated  dollars  annually,  altho  by  no  device  can  it  keep 
the  greater  part  of  them  in  circulation,  on  account  of  their  bulk 
so  inconvenient,  and  on  account  of  their  depreciation  so  unac- 
ceptable to  the  people.  Their  circulation  would  be  far  less  if 
there  were  any  adequate  supply  of  one  and  two  dollar  bills. 
This  simply  proves  that  the  delusion  of  “ fiat  money,”  i.e.,  of 
creating  intrinsic  value  by  simply  legislating  it  into  being,  domi- 
nates the  mind  of  the  nation  to  the  extent  of  inducing  a persis- 
tent attempt  to  add  one  eighth  to  the  intrinsic  value  of  silver, 
by  mere  arbitrary  legislative  decree.  The  principle  is  precisely 
the  same,  altho  less  grossly  applied,  as  if  the  government 
should  order  that  a clipped  dollar,  the  present  half-dollar,  or  a 
pound  of  lead,  or  a piece  of  engraved  irredeemable  paper  should 
be  legal  tender  for  equal  sums  with  the  present  silver  dollar. 
The  only  palliating  circumstance  is  the  fact,  that  the  existing 
silver  dollar  has  the  same  weight  of  silver  as  when  in  a past 
generation  it  was  equal  or  superior  in  bullion  market  value  to 
the  gold  dollar.  They  were  then  both  made  of  equal  legal-ten- 
der value,  because  they  were  deemed  to  have  the  same  intrinsic 
market  value.  When  thus  precisely  equivalent  in  value,  gold 
will  practically  supersede  the  silver  dollars  in  actual  use,  on 
account  of  superior  convenience.  The  fact  that  afterwards  the 
market  value  of  silver  so  advanced  as  to  make  the  standard 
silver  dollar  worth  more  than  the  gold  dollar  drove  it  into  entire 
disuse,  and  so  effectually  demonetized  it,  on  the  principle  that 
the  cheaper  of  two  currencies  of  equal  debt-paying  power  will 
always  drive  out  the  dearer,  all  other  things  being  equal.  Silver 


IO 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


having  been  thus  in  fact  demonetized  except  for  fractions  of  a 
dollar,  the  further  coinage  of  it  was  in  1873  prohibited  by  Con- 
gress. It  was  thus,  to  all  intents  and  purposes,  abandoned  in 
fact,  and  in  the  public  apprehension,  as  a national  coin,  except 
for  small  change.  This  was  the  state  of  things  when  our 
national  loans  were  negotiated.  In  terms  payable  in  coin,  the 
only  coin  meant  and  understood  by  all  parties  was  the  only  coin 
then  made  and  issued  by  the  government,  small  change  excepted, 
i.e.  gold.  This  was  expressed  and  implied  in  all  the  phraseology 
then  in  use  respecting  the  obligations  of  the  government  pay- 
able in  coin.  No  thought  of  restoring  the  old  silver  dollar  in 
coinage  and  use  was  entertained  until  the  Bonanza  silver-mines 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  the  extensive  demonetization  of 
silver  in  Europe  cheapened  it  in  the  markets  of  the  world,  mak- 
ing a silver  dollar  of  the  former  weight  and  fineness  worth  from 
f to  -Jg-  of  the  gold  dollar.  Then  arose  a loud  clamor  for  the 
restoration  and  profuse  coinage  of  the  “dollar  of  the  fathers,” 
made  equal  in  fiat  or  legal  debt-paying  power  to  the  gold  dollar, 
worth  from  10  to  15  cents  above  it  in  the  markets  of  the  world. 
The  profuse  coinage  of  it  was  then  begun,  and  is  now  going  on, 
by  command  of  Congress  making  it  likewise  a legal  tender  for 
all  debts  due  to  and  from  the  government,  and  all  other  persons 
and  parties. 

Now  this  would  have  been  unobjectionable,  not  in  some 
minor  points,  but  in  graver  and  more  essential  aspects,  econo- 
mical and  ethical,  which  awakened  intense  opposition,  had  this 
remonetization  of  silver  been  guarded  by  two  provisions  which 
were  purposely  and  even  defiantly  omitted.  1.  That  at  the 
start  the  silver  in  the  silver  dollar  should  be  so  increased  as  to 
make  it  equal  in  value  to  the  gold  dollar.  2.  That  its  legal- 
tender  quality  should  not  apply  to  debts  contracted  during  the 
period  in  which  it  had  been  demonetized  by  law,  or  of  gold 
monometallism,  but  solely  to  debts  contracted  when  the  silver 
was  concurrently  with  the  gold  the  recognized  legal-tender 
dollar  of  the  country.  With  these  provisions  the  re-introduction 
of  the  silver  dollar  would  have  violated  no  equity.  All  parties 
making  contracts  to  pay  or  receive  money,  or  its  equivalent 
paper  representative,  would  have  done  it  knowing  what  they 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


1 1 


were  about,  and  the  chance  of  the  payer,  and  the  risk  of  the 
payee,  that  if  either  metal  should  depreciate,  the  cheaper  would 
be  used  to  discharge  the  debt.  It  would  be  the  only  fair  bi- 
metallism. It  is  not  in  the  nature  of  things,  or  according  to 
experience,  that  the  relative  values  of  gold  and  silver  should 
remain  unchanged,  whether  as  affected  by  the  cost  of  producing 
them,  or  the  alternations  in  demand  and  supply  for  useful  and 
ornamental  purposes  other  than  money. 

But  as  it  is  impossible  permanently  to  legislate  value  into 
any  human  product  beyond  the  cost  of  its  reproduction,  so  no 
such  factitious  value  can  be  long  injected  into  silver  by  any 
government  or  syndicate  of  governments.  The  recent  confer- 
ence of  diplomatic  representatives  of  the  great  powers  to  fix 
the  relative  values  of  gold  and  silver,  broke  up  without  seriously 
making  the  attempt;  and  well  they  might,  for  all  such  attempts 
are  vain  unless  they  can  prevent  all  discoveries  of  Bonanza 
mines  of  either  metal  to  lessen  the  cost  of  its  production,  or 
can  increase  the  demand  for  it  by  arbitrary  annulment  of  the 
laws  of  human  nature  which  determine  its  wants  and  their  in- 
tensity. The  apparent  exception  in  the  case  of  the  present  con- 
current circulation  of  gold  and  silver  dollars,  the  latter  worth 
in  the  markets  of  the  world  less  than  seven  eighths  of  the  other, 
is  no  real  exception.  It  is  due  wholly  to  government  monopoly 
of  the  coinage  of  silver  dollars.  If  free  coinage  of  silver,  or 
coinage  at  a seignorage  barely  sufficient  to  pay  its  cost,  were 
allowed,  as  in  the  case  of  gold,  the  process  would  be  a very 
short  one  to  the  virtual  demonetization  of  gold.  All  who  had 
debts  of  any  magnitude  to  pay  would  buy  silver  bullion  at  pres- 
ent prices  and  demand  its  coinage  at  the  national  mints,  thus 
saving  one  eighth  of  the  amount  of  the  debt.  The  principal 
accumulations  of  gold  coin,  whether  in  Treasury  or  bank 
vaults,  or  private  hoards,  would  with  great  rapidity  find  their 
way  to  the  melting-pot,  or  to  the  steamship  for  transportation 
to  pay  for  foreign  imports,  when  $871  gold  would  pay  as  much 
as  $1000  silver:  just  as,  during  the  era  of  irredeemable  legal- 
tender  paper,  gold,  being  at  a premium,  was  used  to  discharge 
foreign  debts,  and  the  greenbacks  or  their  representatives  for 
all  domestic  money. 


12 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


The  same  principle  has  been  illustrated  in  reference  to  frac- 
tional currency  throughout  our  whole  history,  which  want  of 
space  alone  prevents  us  from  showing. 

And  to  this  complexion  it  must  come  at  last  with  respect  to 
our  present  silver  dollar,  if  its  coinage  is  persisted  in  even  as  a 
government  monopoly.  The  silver  dollars,  so  far  as  the  gov- 
ernment is  able  to  keep  them  afloat,  keeping  faith  with  its 
bond-holders  by  paying  them  gold  according  to  the  meaning  of 
its  contract  with  them,  and  at  the  same  time  to  avoid  obstruct- 
ing commerce  by  so  bulky  a medium  of  exchange,  are  taken 
without  hesitation  (i)  because  they  are  legal  tender,  and  (2)  be- 
cause creditors  will  take  them  from  their  debtors  so  long  as  they 
know  that  others  will  take  them  from  themselves  in  satisfaction 
of  debts.  On  the  other  hand,  they  do  not  yet  supersede  gold, 
because,  owing  to  the  government  monopoly  of  legal-tender 
silver  dollars,  they  cannot  be  obtained  by  the  people  on  better 
terms  than  gold  dollars.  But  if  government  coinage  of  them 
goes  on  without  check  or  stint,  this  equality  of  the  two  coins, 
and  their  continuance  as  such  in  use  side  by  side,  will  cease. 
In  due  time  the  accumulation  will  be  such  that  government 
must  pay  them  out  profusely  in  discharge  of  its  obligations. 
Its  gold  will  either  be  drawn  from  it  in  preference  by  creditors 
and  note-holders,  or  kept  from  them  and  withheld  from  circula- 
tion. If  drawn  out  it  will  go,  in  one  form  and  by  one  channel 
or  another,  where  it  will  do  something  more  than  pay  debts 
which  are  equally  well  paid  by  a coin  of  seven  eighths  its  value. 
In  either  case  silver,  the  cheaper,  will  banish  gold,  and  converti- 
ble paper  dollars  will  be  only  convertible  into  our  present  silver 
dollars.  This  is  only  a question  of  time,  if  the  present  policy  is 
persisted  in.  This  is  what  the  promoters  of  the  policy  mean, 
so  far  as  they  understand  themselves ; and  at  this  point  they 
know  what  they  are  about  quite  as  well  as  they  can  be  told. 
The  whole  clamor  for  the  present  silver  dollar  being  put  on  an 
equality  with  gold  worth  12^  per  cent  more,  is  for  the  purpose 
of  keeping  the  real  legal-tender  dollar  as  much  below  gold,  as 
much  vitiated,  as  was  the  paper  legal  tender  for  some  years  be- 
fore the  resumption  of  specie  payments.  For  this  reason  we 
greatly  fear  that  the  doctrine  of  “ fiat  money”  would  more  or 
less  dominate  the  policy  of  the  government,  if  it  were  entrusted 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


13 


with  the  delicate  function  of  supplying  the  paper  money  of  the 
country;  and  all  the  more  so,  as  this  would  open  an  easy  way 
to  supply  means  for  the  innumerable  claimants  and  jobbers  who 
are  always  trying  to  enrich  themselves  and  their  constituents 
from  the  national  Treasury.  The  present  silver-dollar  policy  is 
a constant  menace  to  a sound  currency. 

We  are  somewhat  encouraged,  as  we  see  that  Mr.  Burchard, 
Director  of  the  U.  S.  Mint,  hitherto  an  earnest  advocate  of  con- 
tinued coinage  of  the  standard  silver  dollar,  advises  its  discontinu- 
ance, on  the  ground  that,  so  far  from  promoting  the  union  among 
the  nations  to  fix  a ratio  of  valuation  between  silver  and  gold  by 
which  15^  grains  of  the  former  shall  be  equal  to  one  of  the  latter, 
it  rather  retards  that  consummation.  We  warmly  second  his 
proposal,  if  we  cannot  second  his  reasons  for  it.  For  we  do  not 
believe  it  in  the  power  of  the  legislation  of  one  or  many  nations 
to  establish  a fixed  ratio  of  value  between  silver  and  gold,  any 
more  than  between  iron  and  lead,  wheat  and  maize.  Their  rel- 
ative value  must  in  the  long-run  be  determined  by  their  intrin- 
sic value,  and  this  in  turn  by  the  cost  of  production  interwork- 
ing with  the  law  of  supply  and  demand.  Such  value  cannot 
long,  in  any  normal  state  of  things,  exceed  the  cost  of  its  re- 
production. On  the  other  hand,  it  will  cease  to  be  reproduced 
at  existing  prices  unless  they  afford  a profit.  Since,  therefore, 
silver  continues  to  be  largely  produced  at  present  market  rates, 
and,  even  so,  makes  fortunes  for  many  of  its  producers,  it  is  idle 
to  claim  that  it  has,  or  by  legislation  can  permanently  be  made 
to  have,  more  than  its  market  value.  The  rate,  too,  at  which 
gold  bullion  sells,  exceptional  disturbing  influences  aside,  fairly 
represents  the  cost  of  producing  it  as  compared  with  silver.  If 
it  did  not,  if  at  present  market  rates  mining  gold  were  decidedly 
more  profitable  than  mining  silver,  gold-mining  would  increase 
until  the  equilibration  of  the  relative  cost  and  price  of  the  two 
metals  would  be  effected. 

Let  it  be  noted,  however,  that,  whatever  tendency  exists  in 
the  national  government  to  vitiate  its  own  paper  currency  by 
making  its  own  Treasury  notes  legal  tender,  whether  redeemable 
or  irredeemable,  and  however  this  may  be  a reason  for  resort- 
ing to  other  methods  of  supplying  the  needed  paper  currency 
of  the  country,  the  evil  and  the  danger  cannot  be  wholly 


14 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


avoided  so  long  as  the  national  government  issues  its  own 
legal-tender  notes  as  a substantive  part  of  the  national  currency. 
For,  while  it  does  this,  these  notes  are  the  supreme  standard, 
above  which  no  issues  of  banks  or  other  institutions  can  rise. 
As  they  are  obliged  to  receive  legal-tender  notes  in  satisfaction 
of  debts  due  them,  so  they  can  be  required  to  pay  nothing 
higher  in  discharge  of  the  debts  they  owe.  Consequently, 
whatever  the  deterioration  of  the  government  issues,  no  others 
can  rise  above  them.  Until,  therefore,  Congress  can  be  induced 
to  remove  the  temptation  to  vitiate  this  currency  by  utterly 
abolishing  it,  or  the  legal-tender  element  in  future  issues  of  it, 
nothing  is  gained  by  resorting  to  other  methods  of  filling  the 
vacuum  caused  by  the  gradual  extinction  of  the  currency  sup- 
plied by  our  present  national  banks.  Like  the  present  and  past 
notes  of  these  banks,  however  iron-clad  their  security,  it  can 
only  secure  their  being  as  good  as  the  national  legal-tender 
notes  which  make  a complete  redemption  of  them. 

2.  Supposing  the  present  security  of  national-bank  bills  to 
be  no  longer  available,  let  us  next  consider  the  alternative  of 
their  continued  issue  protected  by  the  best  securities  that  re- 
main available.  What  are  these  ? First  in  order  are  State 
stocks.  These  cannot  form  the  basis  of  a national  currency 
when  nearly  one  half  the  State  debts  are  in  default  as  to  their 
interest,  or  under  repudiation  as  to  principal  and  interest.  The 
same  is  true  of  a very  large  proportion  of  all  municipal  debts, 
county,  town,  and  city.  Under  a system  of  State-bank  circula- 
tion there  are  doubtless  a few  States  in  which,  not  only  their  own 
debts,  but  those  of  all  subordinate  municipalities  within  them 
are  to  all  intents  good.  But  in  a national  system  it  would  be 
impossible  to  discriminate  by  any  sure  criterion  sound  from  un- 
sound securities  ; or,  if  this  were  possible,  to  do  it  in  such  a way 
as  not  to  exclude  from  participation  in  the  privileges  of  such 
a banking  system  so  large  a part  of  the  country  as  to  insure 
the  defeat  of  such  legislation  in  Congress. 

3.  Another  plan  of  considerable  merit  for  continuing  the 
issue  of  bills  by  the  national  banks  is,  to  limit  the  amount  of 
them  to  half  the  capital  of  the  bank  issuing  them,  and  make 
them  a first  lien  on  all  its  assets.  No  doubt  this  would  be  ample 
security  for  ordinary  cases.  But  the  failure  of  banks  finally  to 


FUTURE  RARER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


15 


redeem  their  notes  and  pay  their  other  debts  is  not  an  ordinary, 
but  an  extraordinary,  case  under  any  tolerable  system  of  bank- 
ing. We  need  a system  which  will  make  the  notes  worth  their 
face  in  gold  in  all  contingencies.  What  would  such  a system 
amount  to  in  the  case  of  the  late  Mechanics’  National  Bank  of 
Newark,  New  Jersey?  Here  the  losses  of  the  bank  from  the 
thefts  of  its  cashier  and  his  confederates,  artfully  concealed, 
but  stupidly  undiscovered,  were  nearly  five  times  the  capital, 
three  times  the  combined  capital  and  surplus  of  the  institu- 
tion, and  twice  the  amount  of  the  capital,  surplus,  and  the  as- 
sessment upon  the  stockholders  equal  to  the  capital.  As  it  is, 
whoever  else  loses,  the  bill-holders  are  secure,  and  the  notes  as 
good  as  those  of  the  New  York  Bank  of  Commerce.  Still,  with 
any  tolerable  inspection  by  examiners  appointed  for  fitness, 
rather  than  party  service,  it  could  hardly  happen  that  a bank 
could  be  kept  from  going  into  liquidation  before  its  means  were 
too  far  exhausted  to  pay  its  circulating  notes,  if  guarded  on  all 
sides  as  proposed  in  this  plan  of  Mr.  Coe,  submitted  to  the  re- 
cent bankers’  convention.  Nevertheless,  this  plan  falls  below  the 
present  system  of  securing  notes  by  government  stocks  in  one 
very  important  respect.  Government  bonds  can  instantly  be 
turned  into  cash  for  the  redemption  of  the  notes  of  an  insolv- 
ent bank,  as  soon  as  they  are  presented.  No  doubt  exists  any- 
where, or  for  any  time,  as  to  the  equivalency  of  a national-bank 
note  to  its  face  in  coin.  No  one  to  whom  it  is  offered  stops  to 
inquire  whether  it  is  issued  by  a solvent  or  insolvent  bank,  no 
matter  where  located.  The  bills  of  the  Pacific  National  Bank 
of  Boston  just  reported  to  have  failed  are  received  as  readily  as 
those  of  the  New  York  Metropolitan  Bank. 

This  could  not  be  so  in  respect  of  bills  secured  merely  by 
the  ordinary  assets  of  a bank,  consisting  of  the  notes  of  its  bor- 
rowers or  other  investments  usually  made  by  banks,  even  tho 
a prior  lien  upon  them.  For  first,  and  at  best,  it  must  take 
time  to  realize  upon  these  assets  through  the  usual  legal  pro- 
cesses incident  to  insolvent  persons  and  institutions.  This  of 
itself  would  render  the  notes  unbankable,  and  subject  them 
to  more  or  less  discount  for  this  reason.  And  secondly,  in 
nearly  all  cases  of  bank-suspension  (commercial  panics  aside) 
the  insolvency  of  a bank  is  presumptive  evidence,  not  only  of  a 


i6 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


temporary  but  an  absolute  inability  to  meet  its  obligations  to 
a greater  or  less,  certainly  to  some  undefined,  extent.  At  a 
distance  from  them,  often  in  their  immediate  neighborhood, 
such  bills  would  cease  to  circulate.  Bankers  and  money-deal- 
ers in  the  vicinage  would  have  means  of  approximately  esti- 
mating their  value,  and  would  soon  fix  a market  price  for  them 
if  they  were  worth  anything.  Their  value  would  be  inversely  as 
their  distance  from  the  place  of  issue.  Take  for  illustration  the 
two  lately  suspended  banks  to  which  we  have  referred.  With- 
out the  security  of  their  circulating  notes  by  national  stocks, 
who  would  trust  them  beyond  their  immediate  neighborhood, 
even  if  there,  especially  the  bills  of  the  Newark  Mechanics’  Bank? 

This  points  to  another  evil  of  such  a currency,  the  same  in 
kind  as,  but  far  less  in  degree  than,  that  which  prevailed  under 
the  old  system  of  State-bank  currency  before  the  civil  war  and  the 
national  banking  system  which  grew  out  of  it.  The  soundness 
and  solvency  of  each  bank  being  known  only  among  the  people 
in  its  immediate  neighborhood,  the  tendency  of  all  its  circulat- 
ing notes  would  be  to  centre  there,  and  to  possess  only  a local 
credit.  If  they  find  their  way  to  distant  parts  of  the  country, 
they  would,  as  a whole,  be  quite  sure  to  be  sped  back  to  the  re- 
gion where  the  credit  of  the  bank  issuing  them  could  be  known, 
and  their  soundness  at  once  tested.  The  impairment  to  any 
extent  of  the  full  national  credit  of  any  kind  of  paper  money 
in  a like  degree  impairs  its  usefulness.  It  so  far  forth  loses  its 
character  as  currency  and  becomes  classified,  like  a large  portion 
of  the  former  State-bank  issues,  as  “ uncurrent  money,”  because 
in  so  many  places  at  a discount,  or  unbankable  at  its  face  value, 
especially  in  the  great  monetary  centres.  The  evils  of  this  will 
further  appear  as  we  discuss  the  ante-war  State-bank  notes 
which  preceded  those  of  the  national  government  and  the  na- 
tional banks. 

4.  This  system  had  furnished  the  paper  money  of  the  coun- 
try, including  almost  its  entire  circulating  medium,  for  about  a 
quarter  of  a century  preceding  the  outbreak  of  the  war;  and 
concurrently  with  a great  National  Bank  of  the  United  States 
and  its  branches,  chartered  by  the  general  government,  during 
nearly  our  entire  previous  national  history.  We  will  consider 
these  as  they  operated  while  alone,  and  then  as  they  operated 


FUTURE  RARER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


1 7 


while  under  the  concurrent  but  predominating  influence  of  a 
great  overshadowing  United  States  Bank.  Of  course,  it  is  only- 
in  their  relations  to  paper  money,  as  banks  of  issue,  that  we 
have  any  present  call  or  space  to  look  into  them. 

The  States  early  began  to  assume  the  prerogative  of  char- 
tering banks,  not  only  of  discount  and  deposit,  but  of  issue, 
thus,  in  addition  to  other  benefits,  giving  them  the  inducement 
arising  from  the  profits,  to  furnish  the  people  with  the  conven- 
ience, of  paper  money.  It  has  been  a question  whether,  under 
the  provisions  of  the  U.  S.  Constitution  giving  Congress  the 
power  “ to  coin  money,  regulate  the  value  thereof,  and  of  for- 
eign coin,”  and  forbidding  any  State  “ to  coin  money,  emit  bills 
of  credit,  make  anything  but  gold  and  silver  coin  a tender  in 
payment  of  debts,”  the  States  have  the  power  of  indirectly 
emitting  such  bills  of  credit,  through  the  institutions  they  char- 
ter and  authorize  to  emit  them,  for  the  purpose  of  being  used 
as  money,  and  performing  every  ordinary  function  that  the 
coining  of  money  would  perform.  We  think  this  would  be  an 
open  question  now  among  jurists,  had  it  not  been  decided  affir- 
matively by  the  U.  S.  Supreme  Court ; and  that  it  would  bear  re- 
consideration quite  as  well,  if  not  somewhat  better,  than  the  first 
decision  of  that  court  denying  the  constitutionality  of  the  irre- 
deemable U.  S.  legal-tender  notes.  It  is  a curious  commentary 
on  this,  however,  that  the  general  government  in  establishing  the 
national-bank-note  circulation  extinguished  the  power  to  issue 
circulating  notes  which  the  Supreme  Court  had  affirmed  to  be 
lodged  in  the  States  by  the  Constitution,  by  imposing  a io-per- 
cent  tax  upon  it — a sufficient  evidence  that  it  would  be  danger- 
ous to  allow  the  States  to  tax  government  debentures  of  what- 
ever kind ; that  even  if  the  States  have  power  to  authorize 
banks  to  issue  paper  money  ad  libitum , when  the  national  gov- 
ernment has  the  will,  it  can  find  a way  to  stop  it.  A question 
might  arise  here  too  as  to  the  legitimacy  of  imposing  taxes  for 
such  purposes. 

However  this  may  be,  we  have  no  doubt  of  the  expediency 
of  preventing  issues  of  money,  paper  or  metallic,  by  the  States, 
or  by  their  agents  and  institutions,  and  of  putting  upon  what- 
ever is  allowed  to  pass  with  the  imprimatur  of  public  authority, 
as  money,  the  stamp  of  national  authority.  If  the  prohibition 


18 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


were  now  removed,  State  banks  of  issue  would  be  multiplied 
indefinitely,  and  their  unsecured  circulating  notes  would  deluge 
the  land.  During  the  period  of  this  kind  of  currency  it  was 
issued  under  two  systems  as  to  the  constitution  of  the  banks 
themselves,  with  still  further  diversities  of  administration  in 
different  States,  to  insure  the  convertibility  of  their  issues.  The 
two  great  systems  were  banks,  each  with  its  own  special  char- 
ter, and  free  banks,  i.e.  banks  established  under  a general  law 
authorizing  their  formation  by  all  who  would  comply  with  its 
provisions.  The  prevailing  system  was  that  of  special  charter. 
The  free  system  was  an  episode  in  a few  States,  but  it  was  still 
in  operation  in  the  State  of  New  York  when  the  war  broke  out. 
It  undoubtedly  suggested  the  analogous  system  of  free  national 
banks  having  their  circulating  notes  protected  by  adequate  pub- 
lic securities  lodged  with  the  fiscal  department  of  the  State.  It 
followed  the  failure  of  the  safety-fund  system  in  the  State  of 
New  York.  This  required  all  the  banks  of  the  State  to  contrib- 
ute a small  percentage  of  their  capital  annually,  to  be  held  by 
the  State  as  an  insurance  fund  for  the  redemption  of  notes  of 
broken  banks.  It  proved  inadequate  to  bear  the  strain  put 
upon  it  by  the  bank  failures  which  multiplied  through  the 
commercial  panic  extending  from  1837  to  1842.  The  State  of 
New'  York  then  adopted  the  system  of  making  every  new  bank 
and  every  old  bank,  on  the  expiration  of  its  charter,  at  once 
free  and  the  insurer  of  its  own  bills,  by  requiring  the  deposit  of 
an  amount  sufficient  for  the  purpose  in  approved  mortgages 
and  public  stocks,  national,  State,  or  municipal.  This  tempted 
single  men,  and  coteries  of  men,  all  over  the  State,  who  held 
mortgages,  or  the  kind  of  public  stocks  required,  to  organize 
free  banks  and  issue  circulating  notes  nearly  equal  to  the  face 
of  the  securities  deposited,  thus  duplicating  their  interest.  The 
result  vTas  the  speedy  failure  of  many,  and  crippling  of  most  of 
them.  The  security  for  the  bill-holders  proved  imperfect  or 
worthless.  Mortgages,  if  good,  required  a tedious  process  to 
turn  them  into  cash.  Often  the  real  estate  which  secured  them 
shrunk  in  value  far  below  the  face  of  the  mortgage,  and  had  to 
be  accepted  instead  of  cash  by  the  mortgagee,  or  by  the  State 
as  trustee  for  the  bill-holder.  Many  stocks  of  States  since  solv- 
ent then  w'ere  in  default  for  interest.  This  class  of  securities 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


19 


proved  inadequate.  Altogether  the  system  was  a failure,  while 
it  taught  one  great  lesson;  viz.,  that  nothing  is  a proper  security 
for  bank  circulation  but  that  sort  of  public  stocks  which,  in  any 
and  all  circumstances,  have  an  immediate  salable  value  above 
the  face  of  the  notes  protected  by  them.  The  New  York  free- 
banking  system  was  at  length  reformed  so  as  to  rule  out  all  but 
the  highest  grade  of  securities,  such  as  United  States  or  New 
York  State  stocks  or  their  equivalents,  as  the  basis  of  their  bank 
circulation.  At  the  time  of  the  adoption  of  the  national-bank 
system  nearly  all  the  New  York  State  banks  had  got  upon  this 
footing.  The  free-banking  system  which  was  copied  from  New 
York  in  the  adjacent  States  of  New  Jersey  and  Connecticut  had 
only  a transient  trial,  and  disappeared  prior  to  the  war. 

In  the  country  at  large,  for  a quarter  of  a century  before 
the  national-bank  system  was  established,  the  circulating  me- 
dium was  issued  by  banks,  either  under  general  laws,  or  each 
specially  chartered  by  its  own  State,  and  with  various  privileges 
and  restrictions  affecting  the  amount  and  safety  of  their  issues. 
But  the  exceptions  were  few  in  which  banks  were  not  practi- 
cally allowed  to  issue  all  that  they  could  keep  afloat  while  re- 
deeming it  on  presentation.  As  a whole,  banks  were  soundest, 
and  the  baseless  inflation  least,  in  the  older  sections  of  the  coun- 
try and  in  the  strongest  commercial  centres.  What  in  slang 
phrase  was  known  as  “ wild-cat  banking”  was,  as  it  always  will 
be,  most  rampant  in  pioneer  States.  The  results  of  the  sys- 
tem were : 

1.  That  failures  of  banks  were  much  more  frequent  than 
now,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  attempt  was  so  largely  made  to 
create  capital  by  issuing  engraved  notes  representing  no  capital, 
and  having  no  substantial  basis  of  issue  or  redemption. 

2.  Hence  so  many  of  these  bank  notes  became  of  no,  or  of 
uncertain  value,  that,  except  at  their  places  of  issue,  all  were  at 
greater  or  less  discount  proportioned,  other  things  being  equal, 
to  their  distance  from  the  place  of  issue  and  redemption.  At 
their  best  estate,  they  suffered  a discount  equal  to  the  cost  of 
sending  them  to  the  counter  of  the  bank  issuing  them. 

3.  The  loss  of  merchants  whose  business  required  them  to 
receive  remittances  in  bills  of  distant  banks  was  very  large. 
Publishers  of  periodicals  often  lost  from  two  to  five  per  cent  in 


20 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


turning  their  remittances  into  bankable  funds.  Great  banking 
houses  grew  wealthy  in  the  business  of  buying  uncurrent  money 
at  a discount. 

4.  It  was  impossible  to  travel  any  distance  without  taking 
coin  with  all  its  inconvenience  and  exposure. 

5.  The  liability  to  commercial  panics  was  augmented  so  far 
as  it  was  consequent  on  reckless  or  injudicious  banking,  and  fab- 
rication of  paper  money.  Runs  on  banks  always  began  with 
panic-stricken  bill-holders  in  the  vicinity — a thing  impossible  un- 
der our  present  system  of  perfectly  secured  bank  notes. 

No  doubt  similar  evils  would  follow  the  free  re-introduction 
of  State-bank  bills  as  the  paper  currency  of  the  country,  miti- 
gated indeed  on  one  side  by  the  postal  money-order  system  and 
the  great  development  of  railroads  and  telegraphs  through  the 
country,  but  proportionally  aggravated  by  the  immense  increase 
of  its  area,  as  these  affect  the  facility  of  circulating  bank  notes 
and  returning  them  to  bank  counters  for  redemption. 

6.  Prior  to  the  era  we  have  been  considering,  of  a paper  cur- 
rency issued  by  State  banks  in  different  States,  their  operation 
and  influence  were  much  ameliorated  by  the  concurrent  agency 
and  influence  of  a great  overshadowing  United  States  Bank.  Of 
these  there  were  two,  one  succeeding  the  other  after  its  dissolu- 
tion by  the  expiration  of  its  charter.  The  first  was  planned  by 
Alexander  Hamilton,  Washington’s  Secretary  of  the  Treasury, 
and,  largely  through  his  influence,  chartered  by  Congress  in  1791 
for  twenty  years,  with  a capital  of  $10,000,000.  It  was  located 
in  Philadelphia,  with  branches  in  Boston,  New  York,  Baltimore, 
Washington,  Norfolk,  Va.,  Charleston,  Savannah,  New  Orleans. 
It  was  established,  despite  strenuous  opposition  on  alleged  con- 
stitutional and  other  grounds.  But  it  was  found  absolutely 
necessary  as  a fiscal  agent  of  the  government,  a regulator  of 
paper  currency  issued  by  State  banks,  an  instrument  for  carry- 
ing on  the  exchanges  of  the  country,  and,  in  general,  for  evolv- 
ing order  out  of  the  financial  chaos  induced  by  the  expenditures 
of  the  Revolutionary  war,  and  the  enormous  issues  of  irredeem- 
able paper  money  spawned  forth  by  the  States  individually,  and 
as  confederated,  to  carry  it  on.  It  was  of  incalculable  benefit  to 
the  people.  Altho  its  influence  was  great  and  beneficial  upon  the 
currency,  exchanges,  and  business  of  the  country,  yet  the  opposi- 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


21 


tion  to  it  was  great,  not  only  on  account  of  the  natural  antagonism 
of  many  to  great  corporations  and  moneyed  powers,  but  also  to 
its  supposed  inconsistency  with  certain  political  and  constitu- 
tional theories  largely  cherished  by  parties,  and  for  reasons,  we 
have  no  room  here  to  discuss.  Its  charter  was  not  renewed.  But 
the  war  of  1812  immediately  following  its  extinction  brought 
financial  disturbances  and  exigencies  which  made  the  necessity 
of  some  national  fiscal  institution  for  the  transaction  of  govern- 
ment business,  conducting  exchanges,  furnishing  a national  cur- 
rency, and  giving  steadiness  and  trustworthiness  to  the  issues 
of  State  banks,  more  urgent  than  ever.  Accordingly,  in  the 
face  of  strenuous  opposition,  a second  United  States  Bank  was 
chartered  in  1816  for  twenty  years,  with  a capital  of  $35,000,000, 
having  its  central  location  in  Philadelphia,  and  branches  in  other 
chief  commercial  centres.  It  was  started  in  the  midst  of  pre- 
vailing financial  chaos,  and  a generally  depreciated  currency  of 
broken  State  banks,  which  had  been  greatly  multiplied  to  fill 
several  times  over  the  vacuum  created  by  the  extinction  of  the 
original  Bank  of  the  United  States.  After  earnest  and  persis- 
tent struggles  it  brought  order  out  of  this  confusion,  became 
the  great  medium  of  inter-State  exchanges,  and  the  source  and 
promoter  of  a sound  and  stable  national  and  State  currency. 

These  Banks  of  the  United  States  operated  beneficially  in 
various  ways,  which  we  shall  not  here  undertake  further  to  re- 
count. Their  place  has,  in  our  altered  state  of  things,  been 
sufficiently  well  filled  by  the  national  banks  in  respect  to  inter- 
state exchanges,  and  also  with  respect  to  a national  paper  cur- 
rency. We  shall  now  simply  refer  to  their  influence  in  provid- 
ing a sound  national  currency,  and  promoting  soundness  in  the 
circulation  of  State  banks  in  the  absence  of  secured  circulating 
notes  such  as  the  national  banks  now  furnish,  thus  showing 
what  they  might  do  again,  if  this  currency  should  pass  away 
with  the  rapid  discharge  of  the  national  debt. 

First.  These  United  States  banks  furnished  a paper  currency 
really  current  through  the  nation.  It  was  known  to  be  backed 
by  what  was  then  an  immense  capital,  and  to  possess  all  the 
prestige  of  national  authority,  indorsement,  and  use.  Hence  it 
was  received  everywhere  without  discount  as  readily  as  gold  and 
silver  coin.  It  could  be  used  in  travelling  in  every  corner  of  the 


22 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


land.  Through  their  branches  and  the  State  banks  to  which 
their  notes  were  constantly  paid,  they  could  almost  every- 
where be  had  in  exchange  for  bills  of  the  solvent  State  banks. 
When  payments  by  bank  drafts,  checks,  and  bills  of  exchange 
were  less  known  and  available  for  multitudes  than  now,  it  was 
common  to  send  notes  of  the  Bank  of  the  United  States  in  let- 
ters from  one  extreme  of  the  country  to  another.  A common 
method  of  remittance  from  the  South  to  students  in  college,  as 
we  recollect,  was  to  cut  a $100  bill  of  this  bank  in  two,  and  send 
half  in  one  letter  and  half  in  another,  to  guard  against  thefts  in 
the  Post-Office  and  mail  robberies. 

Secondly.  This  U.  S.  Bank  was  felt  in  arresting  extravagant 
and  hazardous  issues  of  circulating  notes  by  State  banks.  For 
such  over-issues  were  sure  to  find  their  way  in  large  quantities 
into  a bank  of  the  magnitude  of  this  institution,  and  they  were 
forthwith  returned  to  the  counters  whence  they  were  issued 
for  redemption.  We  have  no  doubt  that  such  a bank,  with 
sufficient  capital  and  branches,  might  be  so  organized  as  to 
supply  a sound  and  adequate  national  paper  currency,  and  to 
check  the  excessive  formation  and  issues  of  State  banks — to 
be,  indeed,  another  Bank  of  England  here.  But  we  do  not  be- 
lieve that  the  temper  of  the  country  will  permit  its  re-establish- 
ment. Altho  re-chartered  by  Congress,  it  was  vetoed  by  Presi- 
dent Jackson,  and  encountered  from  him  a bitter  and  unrelent- 
ing hostility,  which  succeeded  in  crushing  it.  This  led  to  the 
profuse  chartering  of  new  State  banks.  Many  of  them  pros- 
pered by  Jackson’s  transfer  to  them  from  the  Bank  of  the 
United  States  of  the  government  deposits.  This  was  among 
the  causes  (not,  in  our  opinion,  as  has  so  generally  been  held, 
the  chief  cause),  of  the  great  commercial  panic  and  suspension 
of  specie  payments  from  1837  to  1842.  Speculating  in  land 
instead  of  cultivating  it  was  a far  more  potent  cause,  as  may 
readily  be  seen  if  we  call  to  mind  that  in  1836  breadstuffs  were 
imported  to  this  country  from  Europe,  while  multitudes  of  par- 
venus were  building  palaces  and  sporting  their  horses  and  equi- 
page on  the  basis  of  paper  fortunes  reared  on  farms  converted, 
by  map  at  least,  into  town  and  city  lots.  A great  financier  said 
that  the  trouble  was,  that  “one  half  of  the  people  were  making 
carriages  and  the  other  half  riding  in  them  and  it  was  only  the 


FUTURE  PAPER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


23 


caricature  of  exaggeration.  The  result  was  that  the  Bank  of  the 
United  States,  failing  of  re-charter  by  Congress,  obtained  a char- 
ter from  the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  by  paying  a bonus  of  nearly 
six  millions.  Thus  swept  from  its  proper  national  foundations, 
it  was  plunged  into  the  mire  of  corruption  in  the  very  first  step 
of  its  new  abnormal  career.  Out  of  its  normal  sphere  it  fell 
into  the  hands  of  speculators  and  kiters,  and  so  fell  to  ignomini- 
ous ruin.  It  is  needless  here  to  rehearse  the  steps  by  which  the 
political  revolution  of  1840,  having  for  an  object  the  restoration 
of  the  United  States  Bank,  failed  of  it  through  the  untimely  death 
of  President  Harrison,  and  the  succession  to  his  place  of  a Vir- 
ginia abstractionist,  who  vetoed  the  bill  re-chartering  it.  After 
so  many  mortal  blows  it  died  past  resuscitation,  and  has  left  an 
odor  from  its  expiring  struggles  which,  added  to  the  prevailing 
unpopularity  of  colossal  moneyed  corporations,  will  probably 
prevent  its  reorganization,  whatever  its  capacity  for  usefulness. 
The  insufficiency  of  State  banks,  without  some  such  regulator, 
to  provide  the  currency  we  need,  cannot  be  questioned.  It  is 
almost  equally  certain  that  no  such  regulator  can  be  established, 
even  if  intrinsically  desirable.  If  there  be  a system  of  State  or 
national  banks,  it  should  be  under  a general  law,  and  not  by 
special  charters.  The  bonus  for  the  charter  of  the  United 
States  Bank  by  the  State  of  Pennsylvania  is  only  an  instance, 
of  unparalleled  enormity  indeed,  of  this  sort  of  corruption  in 
granting  special  bank  charters  more  than  forty  years  ago.  If  so 
then,  what  would  it  be  now  ? 

The  outcome  of  the  foregoing  discussion  with  respect  to  the 
paper  money  of  the  future  is: 

1.  That  the  people  will,  and  of  right  ought  to,  have  such 
money,  in  some  form  immediately  convertible  into  specie,  as 
their  chief  circulating  medium. 

2.  That  the  present  national-bank  notes,  secured  by  govern- 
ment stocks,  are  incomparably  the  best  actual  or  possible,  unless 
notes  of  the  government  itself,  based  on  such  coin  reserves  and 
other  provisions  as  shall  secure  their  redeemability  in  every  con- 
tingency less  than  some  great  national  revolution  or  convulsion. 
The  great  question  is  whether  the  disposition  of  the  nation  is 
equal  to  its  power,  to  provide  such  a currency. 

3.  The  gradual  extinction  of  the  national  debt  is  likely  to 


24 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  PIE  IK 


work  the  gradual  extinction  of  our  present  national-bank 
notes. 

4.  The  continuance  of  the  national-bank  issues,  secured  by 
a limitation  of  them  to  from  half  to  two  thirds  of  their  capital, 
and  by  a first  lien  upon  their  assets,  is  somewhat  inferior  to  the 
present  national-bank  currency,  but  immeasurably  superior  to 
any  system  of  bank-note  issue  controlled  by  the  caprice  of  State 
legislatures. 

5.  Such  a State-bank  currency  is  proved  intolerable  both  in 
theory  and  practice. 

6.  State-bank  notes  concurrent  with  the  issues  of  a great 
national  bank  and  branches  everywhere  at  par,  and  at  once 
checking  and  regulating,  while  exchangeable  with  the  former,  is 
a vast  improvement  on  a simple  unmitigated  State-bank-note 
currency.  But  the  traditions  and  instincts  of  the  people  afford 
little  prospect  of  a return  to  such  an  institution. 

7.  An  ultimate  national  Treasury-note  currency  has  the  high- 
est intrinsic  basis  of  soundness  and  redeemability,  if  the  people 
incline  to  use  their  resources  for  this  purpose  aright.  But  the 
temptations  are  strong,  and  in  some  contingencies  might  prove 
irresistible,  to  issue  it  upon  the  principle  of  “ fiat  money,”  in 
quantities  practically  irredeemable. 

8.  On  the  other  hand,  while  any,  even  the  best  form  of  bank 
issues,  except  those  secured  by  government  stocks,  have  less  in- 
trinsic resources  for  securing  redeemability  in  all  circumstances 
than  Treasury  notes,  yet  so  far  as  they  are  affected  by  the 
temper  of  the  people,  this  will  tend  to  hold  them  up  to  specie 
payments,  because  it  is  in  the  highest  degree  exacting  towards 
moneyed  corporations.  But,  in  reference  to  the  government, 
it  is  more  favorably  disposed  towards  free  issues  and  a depreci- 
ated standard  of  currency,  because  it  is  liable  to  conceive  that 
money  is  thus  made  plentiful  and  cheap,  and  that  the  people, 
instead  of  the  banks,  reap  the  profits  of  it. 

Should  the  issue  of  the  national-bank  notes,  or  the  profits  of 
that  issue,  in  any  way  cease,  the  taxes  on  these  institutions  ought 
proportionally  to  cease  or  abate.  Indeed  the  present  rate  of  tax- 
ation upon  bank  capital  is  in  many  instances  simply  extortionate. 
Between  State  and  national  taxation  many  banks  annually  pay 
5 per  cent  or  more  of  their  capital  in  taxes.  This  is  simply 


FUTURE  RARER  MONEY  OF  THIS  COUNTRY. 


25 


burdening  the  cost  of  exchanges,  which  means  ultimately  the 
cost  of  all  articles  of  exchange  to  the  consumer.  It  is  vain  to 
say  that  the  banks  can  and  do  stand  it.  The  more  they  are 
oppressively  burdened,  the  less  they  will  be  multiplied  and  the 
more  they  will  be  decreased.  The  facilities  for  exchange  they 
furnish,  and  the  benefits  of  competition  among  them,  will  pro- 
portionally decline.  The  capital  of  the  banks  in  New  York 
City  was  reduced  by  many  millions  in  order  to  offset  the  tax- 
ation of  their  surplus,  insisted  on  by  assessors  and  sanctioned 
by  the  courts.  So  the  State  lost  both  the  taxes  and  the  advan- 
tages of  a large  banking  and  loan  capital  too.  Many  places  are 
now  deprived  of  the  advantages  of  banking  facilities  on  account 
of  the  taxation  which  crushes  them  out.  Multitudes  are  edu- 
cated by  demagogues  and  other  blind  guides  to  look  at  national 
banks  very  much  as  a mad  bull  looks  at  a red  flag.  This  infuri- 
ated spirit  begets  the  most  wild  and  frantic  assaults  upon  them. 
They  feel  in  the  same  way  about  those  other  great  instruments 
of  exchange,  the  railways.  They  might  as  well  vent  their  spite 
at  steamships  and  other  vehicles  of  transportation  and  exchange, 
and  bring  back  the  glories  of  the  “ Age  of  Homespun,”  or  of 
simple  barbarism.  Let  abuses  be  reformed.  But  reformation 
is  not  destruction. 


Lyman  H.  Atwater. 


THE  MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF 
CHILDREN. 


THE  policy  which  the  German  states  have  long  pursued 
with  more  or  less  constancy  was  first  forcibly  indicated 
by  Luther,  who  declared  that  he  who  did  not  send  his  child  to 
school  must  be  regarded  as  an  enemy  of  the  state.  A strong 
and  almost  universal  public  sentiment,  backed  by  compulsory 
laws  with  cumulative  penalties,  and  rigidly  enforced,  now  gives 
the  greatest  practical  efficacy  to  the  principle  that  all  citizens 
must  send  their  children  to  school  as  well  as,  and  for  the  same 
reasons,  that  they  must  pay  taxes  or  fight  in  time  of  war ; viz., 
pro  bono  publico.  In  his  famous  addresses  to  the  German  na- 
tion Fichte  urged,  near  the  beginning  of  the  century,  that  if 
Germany  was  ever  to  rise  from  the  low  estate  to  which  she  had 
then  fallen,  it  must  be  by  becoming,  as  Nature  and  Providence 
seemed  to  him  to  have  decreed  her,  pre-eminently  and  exclu- 
sively an  educational  state.  It  was  her  peculiar  mission,  he 
believed,  to  develop  educational  institutions,  which  should  sur- 
pass and  give  pattern  to  those  of  all  the  rest  of  the  world,  and 
to  allow  the  German  instinct  for  unity  to  be  moulded  into  the 
form  of  real  nationality  by  these.  Something  like  this  has  be- 
come the  method  of  imperialism  there.  Perhaps  it  is  hardly 
too  much  to  say  that  educational  laws,  methods,  and  establish- 
ments are  the  very  best  products  of  civilization  in  Germany. 
The  lessons  of  history,  past  and  contemporary,  are  brought  to 
bear  by  scholars  and  specialists  of  European  fame  upon  every 
new  measure  proposed  in  diet  or  reichstag;  and  the  ministry 
of  education  is,  to  say  the  least,  second  to  no  department  in  the 
German  cabinet.  The  general  result  is  that,  while  no  modern 
state  has  had  greater  obstacles  to  overcome,  such  as  provincial- 
ism, the  worst  of  military-strategic  situations,  poverty,  an  aggra- 
vated and  ever-recurring  religious  question,  etc.,  the  German 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  2 7 


state  to-day  is  very  strong  not  only  in  material,  but  also  in  the 
ideal  elements  of  national  strength.  More  than  any  other  gov- 
ernment she  has  known  how  to  adopt  the  best  features  of  both 
the  Roman  and  the  Greek  states,  and  in  several  of  its  more 
unobjectionable  aspects  she  has  even  actualized  the  Platonic 
Republic,  in  which  the  chief  care  of  the  law-giver  was  the  educa- 
tion of  the  young.  Her  methods  and  aims  in  this  direction  are 
now,  especially  since  the  Franco-Prussian  war,  slowly  gaining 
force  in  the  school  legislation  of  most  countries  of  continental 
Europe,  as  well  as  in  our  own. 

But  if  popular  education  is  now  assumed  as  a condition  of 
existence  for  monarchies,  it  is  obviously  far  more  essential  to 
the  stability  and  permanence  of  a republic,  governed  by  nearer 
the  average  intelligence,  and  where  schools  have  most  to  do  in 
determining  the  level  of  that  average,  and  with  practically  no 
educational  qualification  for  citizenship.  If,  in  view  of  this,  any 
one  will  take  the  trouble  to  look  over  the  statistics  of  illiteracy 
in  our  own  country,  or  to  examine,  if  only  cursorily,  the  present 
educational  condition  of  the  Southern  States  and  its  obvious 
and  undisputed  effects  upon  the  tone  of  public  life,  or  to  read 
up  some  representative  chapter  of  the  recent  history  of  our  edu- 
cational legislation  and  to  observe  how  much  of  it  is  distorted 
and  perverted  by  jobbery  or  partisan  interests,  compromises, 
etc.,  and  how  much  more  of  it  is  the  work  of  the  ambition  of 
incompetent  third-rate  legislators,  he  will  perhaps  begin  to  real- 
ize more  plainly  than  ever  before  in  how  real  and  literal  a sense 
the  life  of  our  republic  is  a struggle  for  existence  against  igno- 
rance and  the  evils  which  troop  in  its  train,  and  to  see  how  it  is 
that  the  question  whether  a republican  form  of  government  can 
be  permanent  is  at  bottom  a question  of  education.  There  is 
ample  evidence  that  the  founders  of  our  institutions  realized 
more  clearly  than  we  do  that  “ a republic  demands  for  its  con- 
tinued existence  a higher  standard  of  both  knowledge  and  vir- 
tue among  the  people  than  any  other  form  of  government,” 
that  school  laws  are  the  most  fundamental  department  of  legis- 
lation in  a republic,  and  that  the  peculiar  political  problems 
liable  to  a republic  can  be  finally  solved  not  by  the  legislation 
of  majorities,  but  gradually  and  by  no  other  means  than  by  edu- 
cation. Indeed,  our  patriotism  is  not  so  much  love  of  past  his- 


28 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


tory  or  confidence  in  present  institutions  as  it  is  belief  that 
human  nature  is  at  bottom  good,  and  trust  in  the  beneficent, 
regulative  power  of  knowledge. 

The  notion  of  freedom  as  quite  commonly  interpreted  is 
strictly  anti-pedagogic.  John  Stuart  Mill  is  wrong.  The  laissez 
faire,  laissez  aller  principle  is  suicidal  in  a republic,  impressive  as 
is  the  casuistry  with  which  it  is  so  often  defended.  There  must 
be  despotism  here  if  need  be.  There  will  always  be  many  who 
will  have  to  be  forced  to  go  to  school,  coaxed,  hired,  threatened, 
flogged,  trepanned  almost  to  learn  when  they  are  there,  and  con- 
stantly watched  and  withheld  from  every  evasion  or  way  of  es- 
cape. Some  can  respond  to  no  motives  but  love,  praise,  and 
reward,  and  would  be  spoiled  by  coercion,  while  others,  in  whom 
these  main-springs  of  action  do  not  exist  and  cannot  be  devel- 
oped, respond  readily  and  naturally  only  to  a rod  of  the  liberal 
dimensions  prescribed  by  German  school  laws.  Moral  freedom 
is  attained  only  in  so  far  as  the  highest  motives  are  spon- 
taneously and  autonomously  acted  upon,  and  as  lower  selfish 
motives  are  disregarded.  This  real  freedom  is  the  end  of  edu- 
cation, and  if  it  be  assumed  at  the  beginning  education  is  im- 
possible. 

There  are  now  abundant  indications  that  we  are  again  be- 
ginning to  realize  that  the  three  R’s,  or  indeed  intellectual 
training  alone,  is  not  all  that  is  meant  by  education,  as  is  so 
often  implied  by  current  educational  rhetoric.  When  we  speak 
of  loving  knowledge  for  its  own  sake  we  mean  for  the  sake 
of  its  effect  on  our  characters  as  distinguished  from  all  mate- 
rial advantages  which  may  result  from  it.  Strictly  speaking, 
love  of  knowledge  for  its  own  sake  is  a psychological  impossi- 
bility. It  cannot  exist  without  affecting  conduct  and  character, 
and  its  value  is  measured  by  the  way  and  the  degree  in  which  it 
does  so.  That  knowledge  can  have  any  intrinsic  value  in  and  of 
itself  alone  is,  indeed,  the  superstition  of  rationalism  and  Sclair- 
cissement , and  is  no  less  misleading  than  is  the  merely  commer- 
cial view  of  it.  Like  light,  knowledge,  it  is  well  said,  is  good  to 
see  by  rather  than  to  see.  Without  exerting  or  ripening  into 
ethical  potency,  knowledge  is  not  power  but  weakness,  and  is 
nearly  as  likely  to  arm  the  bad  as  the  good  elements  of  the  soul 
and  of  society.  German  educators  at  least  have  little  respect 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  29 

for  the  Platonic  scruple  whether  virtue  can  be  taught,  and  so 
call  their  department  pedagogy  (which  even  Hegel  defined  as 
pre-eminently  the  art  of  making  men  moral),  despite  the  un- 
pleasant associations  which  the  word  calls  up,  because  the  term 
includes  moral  discipline  in  addition  to  mere  didactics.  They 
assume  that  “ life  without  knowledge  is  better  than  knowledge 
which  does  not  affect  life,”  and  that  “ all  which  frees  the  mind 
is  disastrous  if  it  does  not  at  the  same  time  give  self-control  and 
make  us  better.”  In  a republic,  then,  in  a peculiar  sense,  I con- 
clude, moral,  at  the  very  least,  as  much  as  intellectual  training 
is  the  obligation  which  the  schools  owe  to  the  state  and  even 
to  society. 

To  realize  how  great  and  peculiar  is  the  need  of  moral  train- 
ing in  this  country  we  need  simply  to  reflect  that  nowhere 
are  children  emancipated  from  the  control  of  parents  at  so 
early  an  age,  that  nowhere  is  individual  liberty  respected,  or 
self-control  and  spontaneity  addressed  so  precociously.  The 
American  child,  too,  comes  into  incessant  contact  with  children 
of  all  social  grades  and  nationalities,  and  is  more  liable  to  the 
contagion  of  vice.  It  should  also  not  be  forgotten  that  frauds 
in  business  and  politics  make  public  life,  in  which  scarcely  any 
great  event  has  of  late  been  accomplished  without  scandal,  a 
school  of  immorality  for  the  young.  Private  character  is  sub- 
jected to  unusual  strains  in  many  ways,  including  all  those 
peculiar  to  a period  of  transition  in  matters  of  faith,  and  the 
administration  of  justice,  in  which  republics  so  easily  and  fatally 
fail,  is  already  in  many  portions  of  our  land,  to  say  the  least, 
exceedingly  imperfect.  It  is  not  pleasant  to  dwell  upon  pictures 
like  these,  nor  is  it  pessimistic ; but  it  is  simply  unpatriotic  to 
refuse  to  recognize  tendencies  which  strike  competent  foreign 
students  of  our  institutions  so  forcibly  and  against  which  the  in- 
fluences of  education  should  be  mainly  directed. 

In  most  European  systems  moral  is  intimately  bound  up 
with  religious  training ; the  moral  code  is  derived  from  Scrip- 
tures, much  as  it  is  by  very  many  teachers  of  religion  in  our 
own  country.  Here,  too,  moral  training  has  in  the  past  been  left 
mainly  to  the  church,  the  strong  line  of  partition  between 
which  and  the  state  is  perhaps  the  most  original  and  cherished 
solution  of  the  religious  question  in  history. 


30 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


Salutary  and  important  as  this  principle  has  proved.it  hardly 
need  be  said  that  it  must  not  be  too  rigorously  insisted  upon. 
If  each  sharp-scented  sectary  in  this  land  of  sects  had  been 
allowed  to  go  through  all  the  school-books  and  sift  out  all  that 
seemed  objectionable  to  him;  if  the  Jew  were  permitted  to 
eliminate  all  that  was  distasteful  to  him  in  the  history  of  primi- 
tive Christianity,  and  the  Catholic  to  weed  out  the  story  of  the 
Reformation  and  evolutionary  text-books,  and  if  Quakers,  athe- 
ists, Methodists,  and  all  the  rest  could  challenge  what  their 
respective  consciences  found  offensive,  what  sort  of  a curriculum 
would  be  left  in  history,  literature,  or  the  arts?  Yet  altho  the 
separation  between  school  and  church  can  never  be  absolute, 
because  the  human  soul  cannot  be  cleft  in  two,  the  method 
has  such  practical  advantages,  and  is  so  congenial  an  expression 
of  the  instinct  of  religious  toleration,  that  it  is  quite  commonly 
assumed  that  the  state  has  no  right  whatever  to  inquire  into  the 
efficiency  of  the  ethico-religious  methods  of  training  adopted  by 
the  church,  still  less  to  interfere  with  them,  whatever  their  char- 
acter or  however  great  the  public  need. 

The  difficulty  of  coming  into  close  quarters  with  our  theme 
is  vastly  augmented  by  the  fact  that  the  literature  upon  the 
subject  is  so  voluminous  that  most  of  it  represents  the  views  of 
single  individuals,  denominations,  or  confessions,  and  that  no 
serious  or  competent  attempt  has  been  made,  at  least  in  the 
English  language,  to  give  comprehensive,  practical,  organic  form 
to  the  insights  that  must  be  sought  from  so  many  widely  differ- 
ing sources.  Some  one  has  conjectured  that  if  all  the  volumes 
now  in  existence  which  are  expressly  devoted  to  moral  and 
religious  training  were  piled  together,  a structure  as  large  as 
the  tower  of  Babel  might  be  reared  of  them  alone,  and  adds 
that  if  they  could  all  speak,  a confusion  of  tongues  surpassing 
the  “ Babel-babble”  would  be  heard.  Not  only  Catholics,  Jews, 
and  sceptics  but  all  Protestant  sects  have  contributed  to  this 
confusion,  until  many  have  drawn  hence  additional  reason  for 
complacency  in  things  as  they  are,  and  until,  altho  we  are  just 
beginning  to  seek  a course  in  practical  mechanics  for  public 
schools  so  generic  that  no  special  industry  shall  be  favored  above 
another,  and  of  utility  for  all  children  like  the  three  R’s,  the  very 
possibility  of  such  a course  in  religion  and  morals  as  shall  be 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OR  CHILDREN.  3 1 


impartial  to  all  the  sects,  but  helpful  to  each  of  them,  is  doubted 
or  even  denied.  Scarcely  a decade  ago  most  of  us  would  have 
perhorresced  the  idea  that  there  could  be  a seven  years’  course 
of  Bible  study  adopted  in  common  by  most  of  the  Protestant 
sects.  But  it  is  plain  that  the  consensus  respecting  right  and 
wrong  conduct  is  still  wider.  Much  moral  truth  is  taught  in 
common  by  Jews,  Catholics,  and  Protestants  by  unpedagogic 
methods,  which  would  be  greatly  improved  if  the  same  common 
matter  were  to  be  admitted  by  the  consent  of  all  into  the  public 
schools.  The  deeper  and  broader  the  religious  life,  or  conscious- 
ness, experience,  insight,  the  larger  does  this  common  element 
become.  Indeed,  the  existence  and  need  of  common  elements 
which  no  one  can  doubt,  which  must  be  held  by  all,  always  and 
everywhere,  which  men  must  believe  as  men,  has  been  postu- 
lated often  enough  by  Protestant  thinkers,  and  underlies  the 
very  idea  of  Catholicity  and,  in  fine,  of  religion  itself.  The  very 
idea  of  Bible  is  consensus.  It  assumes  the  same  needs,  instincts, 
possibilities,  talents,  and  predispositions  in  all  for  receiving  the 
deliverances  of  the  highest  of  all  muses,  the  Holy  Spirit. 

So  far  as  the  psycho-pedagogic  or  practical  character  is  con- 
cerned, and  rigorously  excluding  every  other  aspect  of  it,  religion 
is  most  fundamentally  characterized  as  the  popular  culture  of 
the  highest  ideal  as  opposed  to  material  utility,  which  dominates 
so  many  of  our  intellectual  interests,  by  reconformity  of  life  to 
it.  It  may  be  formulated  as  unity  with  nature,  as  the  readjust- 
ment of  conduct  to  conscience,  as  restored  harmony  with  self, 
reunion  with  God,  newly  awakened  love  for  Jesus,  fresh  insight 
into  his  mind  as  new  impulse  to  do  his  will.  The  common  ele- 
ment is  obvious.  There  has  been  a loss  of  the  primitive  relation 
or  attitude  to  the  highest  or  ideal  norm,  and  man  struggles  back,  * 
not  without  pain  and  great  effort,  to  restore  the  lost  relation- 
ship. In  a word,  there  must  be  atonement  with  implication  of 
previous  estrangement.  When  this  process  is  conceived  as  in- 
tellectual, faith  or  intuition  are  said  to  close  in  with  certain  doc- 
trines considered  as  normative  and  central ; as  emotional  the 
heart  is  reconciled  and  loves  a divine  person,  and  as  volitional 
God’s  will  is  done.  How  man  came  to  deviate  from  the  ideal, 
the  cause  and  extent  of  the  alienation ; how  the  ideal  is  to  be 
conceived,  whether  subjectively  as  conscience  or  a higher  in- 


32 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


stinct  always  pointing  toward  the  undiscovered  pole  of  human 
destiny,  or  objectively  as  an  offended  deity  who  must  be  placated 
by  religious  observances,  or  as  the  incarnate  logos ; how  the  rec- 
onciliation takes  place,  whether  the  divine  ideal  inclines  to  us  or 
we  to  it  first,  most,  or  on  what  occasion  and  motive,  and  in  the 
face  of  what  difficulties  and  with  what  kind  of  mediation,  if  any  ; 
and  possibly  even  whether  the  whole  process  be  literally  real 
and  actual,  and  accomplished  in  one  time  and  place  for  all  times 
and  places,  or  an  expression  for  the  whole  course  of  individual  life 
and  human  history ; or,  finally,  as  a sort  of  formulation  which 
some  universal  sentiment,  like,  e.g.,  that  of  absolute  dependence, 
gives  itself  naturally  in  all  ripely  developed  lives,  or  indeed  all 
these  at  once,  the  results  here  and  hereafter, — these  questions, 
important  as  they  have  become,  must  be  subordinated  as  differ- 
ent explanations  of  the  one  great  law  under  which  morality  itself 
as  well  as  religion  is  included.  The  difference  between  the 
lowest,  most  undeveloped,  or  natural  religion  and  its  highest 
form  of  revealed  Christianity  is  so  vast,  and  so  justly  emphasized 
by  the  church  because  it  is  so  essentially  pedagogic  and  practi- 
cal, or  because  it  makes  what  the  individual  is  too  limited  to 
more  than  vaguely  anticipate,  so  articulate,  apprehensible,  and 
available  as  a stimulus  and  guide  to  right  conduct.  It  is  not 
mere  subjectivism,  as  Palmer  charges  in  his  “ Evangelischen 
Padagogik,”  to  say  that  there  must  be  a natural  instinct  in  man 
coinciding  more  or  less  exactly  with  all  that  revelation  gives, 
because  but  for  this  the  latter  would  be  unapprehensible  and 
worthless.  Indeed,  it  is  because  this  fundamental  native  in- 
stinct, often  described  as  longing,  craving,  homesickness  for 
the  good  and  true,  is  undeveloped  that  religion  is  so  often  con- 
ceived as  the  irruption  of  a foreign  principle,  a graft  from  a new 
stock.  It  is  a psychological  impossibility  to  teach  anything 
as  purely  authoritative.  If  religion  can  be  taught  or  revealed,  it 
must  already  be  preformed  in  us  by  nature,  tho  it  may  be 
but  dimly.  The  teacher,  then,  must  ever  regard  and  inculcate 
religion  as  in  a sense  a growth  or  development,  and  in  such  a 
way  that  this  natural  predisposition  be  neither  neglected,  re- 
pressed, nor  distorted.  The  pupil  should,  and  in  fact  naturally 
does,  repeat  the  course  of  the  development  of  the  race,  and 
education  is  simply  the  expediting  and  shortening  of  this  course. 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  33 


This  latter  is  mainly  accomplished  in  religious  training  by  avoid- 
ing the  countless  and  tedious  deviations,  superstitions,  and 
errors  which  make  up  so  large  a part  of  the  history  of  religion. 
In  a word,  religion  is  the  most  generic  kind  of  culture  as  op- 
posed to  all  systems  or  departments  which  are  one-sided.  All 
education  culminates  in  it  because  it  is  the  chief  among  human 
interests,  and  because  it  gives  inner  unity  to  the  mind,  heart, 
and  will.1 

It  only  remains  to  be  said  that  this  common  element  of  union, 
alienation  from  and  reunion  with  God,  is  first  and  most  pro- 
found both  logically  and  psychologically.  The  points  of  differ- 
ence between  sects,  and  perhaps  to  some  extent  between  the 
ethnic  religions,  have  their  justification  in  natural  differences 
of  race,  temperament,  culture,  and  associative  connections  of 
thought  and  feeling  generally  which  are  not  developed  in  child- 
hood. All  differences  of  this  sort  should  have  a very  subordi- 
nate place  or  none  at  all  in  the  religious  training  of  the  young. 
For  a child  to  know  more  about  matters  that  are  peculiar  to  the 
sects,  or  even  to  Protestantism  as  opposed  to  Catholicism,  than 
about  the  practical  notions  of  religion  itself  would  be  as  absurd 
pedagogically  as  for  a medical  student  to  learn  the  fine  points 
of  difference  between  the  nativistic  and  empirical  theories  of 
physiological  optics  before  the  fundamental  structure  of  the 
eye  was  understood.  We  are  now  ready  to  inquire  how  this 
common  element  should  be  taught. 

II.  To  be  really  effective  and  lasting,  moral  and  religious 
training  must  begin  in  the  cradle.  It  was  a profound  remark  of 
Frobel,  who,  altho  he  could  study  only  borrowed  babies  because 
he  had  none  of  his  own,  has  really  seen  further  into  the  infant 
soul  than  Darwin,  Taine,  Preyer,  Kussmaul,  or  Romanes  in  their 
baby-studies,  that  the  unconsciousness  of  a child  is  rest  in  God. 

1 Cf.,  on  this  paragraph,  Diesterweg,  “Wegweiser  zur  Bildung  fur  Deutsche 
Lehrer,”  5te  Auflage,  1875.  Bd.  II.  s.  3,  et  seq. 

Th.  Waitz,  “ Allgemeine  Padagogik.”  2te  Auflage,  1875.  Bd.  II.  s.  279-95. 

Fr.  Dittes,  “ Schule  der  Padagogik.”  1875.  S.  432-53. 

Ostermann,  “ Padagogische  Psychologie”  (on  Lotze’s  basis).  1880.  S.  60,  et 

seq. 

Ziller,  “Allgemeine  Padagogik.”  1876.  S.  153,  et  seq. 

Schrader,  “ Erziehungs-  u.  Unterrichts-lehre,”  p.  306,  et  seq. — eta/. 

3 


34 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


This  need  not  be  understood  in  any  pantheistic  sense.  From 
this  rest  in  God  the  childish  soul  should  not  be  abruptly  or  pre- 
maturely aroused.  A generic  germinal-physical  sensation  be- 
fore the  special  senses  develop  their  functions,  a vacuous  envis- 
agement  of  pure  being,  a feeling  of  transcendent  happiness  or 
even  angelic  communion,  gradually  lapsing  into  the  particular 
experiences  of  life,  have  all  been  conjectured,  and  may,  for 
aught  we  can  prove  to  the  contrary,  all  exist  in  the  infant  soul, 
down  and  back  into  which  scientific  observation  has  scarcely 
more  than  just  begun  its  explorations.  Even  the  primeval 
stages  of  psychic  growth,  or  objectivization,  are  rarely  so  all- 
sided,  so  purely  unsolicited,  spontaneous,  and  unprecocious,  as 
not  to  be  in  a sense  a fall  from  Frobel’s  unconsciousness  or  rest 
in  God.  The  sense  of  touch,  the  mother  of  all  the  other  senses, 
is  the  only  one  which  the  child  brings  into  the  world  already 
experienced ; but  by  the  pats,  caresses,  hugs,  etc.,  so  instinctive 
with  young  mothers,  varied  feelings  and  sentiments  are  commu- 
nicated to  the  child  long  before  it  recognizes  its  own  body  as 
distinct  from  things  about  it.  The  mother’s  face  and  voice  are 
the  first  conscious  objects  as  the  infant  soul  unfolds,  and  she 
soon  comes  to  stand  in  the  very  place  of  God  to  her  child.  All 
the  religion  of  which  the  child  is  capable  during  this  by  no 
means  brief  stage  of  its  development  consists  of  those  senti- 
ments— gratitude,  trust,  dependence,  love,  etc. — now  felt  only  for 
her  which  are  later  directed  toward  God.  The  less  these  are 
now  cultivated  toward  the  mother,  who  is  now  their  only  fitting 
if  not  their  only  possible  object,  the  more  feebly  they  will  later 
be  felt  toward  God.  This,  too,  adds  greatly  to  the  sacredness 
and  the  responsibilities  of  motherhood.  I believe  with  Frobel 
that  thus  fundamental  religious  sentiments  can  be  cultivated  in 
the  earliest  months  of  infancy,  altho  I cannot  see  all  the  efficacy 
his  followers  claim  for  the  means  to  this  culture  developed  in 
his  “ mother  and  cosseting  songs.”  It  is  of  course  impossible 
not  to  seem,  perhaps  even  not  to  be,  sentimental  upon  this 
theme,  for  the  infant  soul  has  no  other  content  than  senti- 
ments, and  because  upon  these  rests  the  whole  superstructure  of 
religion  in  child  or  adult.  The  mother’s  emotions,  and  physical 
and  mental  states,  indeed,  are  imparted  and  reproduced  in  the 
infant  so  immediately,  unconsciously,  and  through  so  many 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  * 35 

avenues,  that  it  is  no  wonder  that  women  are  more  disposed 
than  men  to  believe  in  occult  and  perhaps  supernatural  influ- 
ences or  rapports  connecting  the  souls  of  distinct  individuals. 
Whether  the  mother  is  habitually  under  the  influence  of  calm 
and  tranquil  emotions,  or  her  temper  is  fluctuating  or  violent, 
or  her  movements  are  habitually  energetic  or  soft  and  caressing, 
or  she  be  regular  or  irregular  in  her  ministrations  to  the  infant 
in  her  arms,  all  these  characteristics  and  habits  are  registered  in 
the  primeval  language  of  touch  upon  the  nervous  system  of  the 
child  as  surely  as  the  planchette  responds  to  the  influences  of 
unconscious  cerebration.  At  no  period  of  life  is  it  truer  in  a 
broader  sense  that  she  does  most  for  her  child  who  does  most 
for  herself.  All  that  affects  her  affects  it.  From  this  point  of 
view  poise  and  calmness,  the  absence  of  all  intense  stimuli  and 
of  sensations  or  transitions  which  are  abrupt  or  sudden,  and  an 
atmosphere  of  quieting  influences,  like  everything  which  retards 
by  broadening,  is  in  the  general  line  of  religious  culture.  Fr5- 
bel  well  compared  thfe  soul  of  an  infant  to  a seed  planted  in  a 
garden.  It  was  not  pressed  or  moved  by  the  breezes  which 
rustled  the  leaves  overhead.  The  sunlight  did  not  fall  upon 
it,  and  even  dew  and  evening  coolness  scarcely  reached  it ; 
but  yet  there  was  not  a breath  of  air,  nor  a ray  of  sunshine, 
nor  a drop  of  moisture  to  which  it  was  unresponsive,  and 
which  did  not  stir  all  its  germinant  forces.  The  child  is  a 
plant,  must  live  out  of  doors  in  proper  season,  and  there 
must  be  no  forcing.  Religion,  then,  at  this  important  stage,  at 
least,  is  naturalism  pure  and  simple  and  nothing  more,  and 
religious  training  is  the  supreme  part  of  standing  out  of  nature’s 
way.  So  implicit  is  the  unity  of  soul  and  body  at  this  forma- 
tive age  that  care  of  the  body  is  the  most  effective  ethico- 
religious  culture. 

This  is  not  the  place  to  enter  into  details  respecting  the 
psychic  growth  of  children,  but  it  should  be  specified  that,  how- 
ever successfully  it  may  be  delayed,  the  time  must  come  when 
the  child  will  know  its  own  limbs,  then  its  own  body  as  a'whole 
as  distinct  from  other  objects,  and  when  its  narrow  circle  of  re- 
membered and  associated  impressions  rounds  off  into  a rudi- 
mentary personality.  Fichte  thought  this  stage  epochal,  and 
celebrated  it  by  a banquet  when  his  child  first  used  the  pro- 


36 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


noun  I.  Frobel  thought  this  independence  could  be  cultivated 
earlier  by  the  little  game  of  bo-peep  on  the  mother’s  lap,  by 
holding  the  child  erect  at  arm’s  length  from  its  mother,  etc.  As 
the  infant  thus  learns  to  distinguish  between  what  it  does  to  or 
for  itself  and  what  others  do  for  it,  it  becomes  capable  of  com- 
manding and  obeying,  of  helping  itself,  and  of  feeling  the  na- 
tural consequences  of  its  own  acts.  Its  cerebral  centres  are 
rapidly  taking  shape  and  acquiring  firmness  of  texture,  and  it 
should  be  most  carefully  thrown  on  its  own  resources  so  far  as 
they  are  fully  developed,  but  no  farther.  Before  the  child  can 
speak  the  mother  is  called  upon  to  distinguish  between  the 
sounds  which  spring  from  helplessness  and  dependence,  and 
real  needs  which  should  be  cultivated  on  the  principle  of  broad- 
ening by  retarding,  and  those  which  spring  from  the  moods  and 
whims  of  an  embryonic  personality  which  may  be  dwarfed  or 
perverted  if  allowed  to  functionate  too  early,  as  surely  as  its  legs 
may  become  bandied  by  trying  to  walk  prematurely.  It  is  be- 
cause as  babies  grow  few  and  rare,  and  as  mothers  tend  to 
become  more  fond  than  wise,  that  this  tender  but  important 
cradle-battle  so  often  goes  against  the  latter,  and  children  are 
spoiled,  mothers  enslaved,  and  instead  of  pleasures  which  are 
few,  mild,  and  uniform,  special,  unusual,  and  intense  enjoy- 
ments which  bring  reactions  are  permitted,  and  artificial  sys- 
tems of  rewards  and  punishments  are  resorted  to,  while  the 
mother  gradually  loses  her  influence  over  the  child  before  the 
dawn  of  that  adolescent  age  in  which  maternal  influences  and 
home-ties  should  be  at  their  strongest  and  best.  The  great 
lesson  of  this  protracted  stage  of  development  is  the  limitation 
of  the  absolute  selfishness  of  infant  nature,  and  the  recognition 
of  and  entire  subordination  to  the  rights  of  others  upon  whom 
it  must  be  made  to  feel  its  almost  absolute  dependence.  No 
sharp  or  rude  constraints  should  interfere  with  the  expansion  of 
its  sympathies  and  affections  to  others,  and  no  indulgences 
should  obviate  the  lesson  of  quiet  submission  to  the  authority 
and  even  convenience  of  adult  wisdom  above  its  own.  The 
child  has  few  rights  other  than  the  satisfaction  of  its  physical 
needs,  for  it  can  perform  few  duties. 

Next  to  be  considered  are  the  sentiments  which  unfold 
under  the  influence  of  that  fresh  and  naive  curiosity  which 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  37 


attends  the  first  impressions  of  natural  objects  from  which 
both  religion  and  science  spring  as  from  one  common  root. 
The  awe  and  sublimity  of  a thunder-storm,  the  sights  and 
sounds  of  a spring  morning,  objects  which  lead  the  child’s 
thoughts  to  what  is  remote  in  time  and  space,  old  trees,  ruins, 
the  rocks,  and,  above  all,  the  heavenly  bodies, — the  utilization  of 
these  lessons  is  the  most  important  task  of  the  religious  teacher 
during  the  kindergarten  stage  of  childhood.  Still  more  than  the 
undevout  astronomer,  the  undevout  child  under  such  influences 
is  abnormal.  In  these  directions  the  mind  of  the  child  is  as 
open  and  plastic  as  that  of  the  ancient  prophet  to  the  prompt- 
ings of  the  inspiring  Spirit.  The  child  can  recognize  no  essential 
difference  between  nature  and  the  supernatural,  and  the  prod- 
ucts of  mythopoeic  fancy  which  have  been  spun  about  natural 
objects,  and  which  have  lain  so  long  and  so  warm  about  the 
hearts  of  generations  and  races  of  men,  are  now  the  best  of  all 
nutriments  for  the  soul.  To  teach  scientific  rudiments  only  about 
nature,  on  the  shallow  principle  that  nothing  should  be  taught 
which  must  be  unlearned,  or  to  encourage  the  child  to  assume 
the  critical  attitude  of  mind,  is  dwarfing  the  heart  and  prema- 
turely forcing  the  head.  To  indulge  in  goody  talks,  or  to  mor- 
alize about  God  or  heaven,  is  here  impertinent  and  stultifying. 
The  one  course  paralyzes  the  healthiest  and  strongest  senti- 
ments, the  other  cultivates  sentimentality  and  the  affectation  of 
impossible  insights,  or  else  makes  these  subjects  uninteresting 
or  positively  distasteful  later,  when  the  mind  is  ripe  for  them. 
It  has  been  said  that  country  life  is  religion  for  children  at  this 
stage.  However  this  may  be,  it  is  clear  that  natural  religion 
is  rooted  in  such  experiences,  and  precedes  revealed  religion  in 
the  order  of  growth  and  education,  whatever  its  logical  order  in 
systems  of  thought  may  be.  A little  later  habits  of  truthful- 
ness are  best  cultivated  by  the  use  of  the  senses  in  exact  obser- 
vation. To  see  a simple  phenomenon  in  nature  and  report  it  fully 
and  correctly  is  no  easy  matter,  but  the  habit  of  trying  to  do  so 
teaches  what  truthfulness  is,  and  leaves  the  impress  of  truth 
upon  the  whole  life  and  character.  I do  not  hesitate  to  say, 
therefore,  that  elements  of  science  should  be  taught  to  children 
for  the  moral  effects  of  its  influences.  At  the  same  time  all 
truth  is  not  sensuous,  and  this  training  alone  tends  to  make  the 


33 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


mind  pragmatic,  dry,  and  insensitive  or  unresponsive  to  that 
other  kind  of  truth  the  value  of  which  is  not  measured  by  its 
certainty  so  much  as  by  its  effect  upon  us.  Renan  has  remarked 
in  substance  that  all  higher  truth  consists  in  nuances,  which 
play  over  that  realm  of  conscience  and  the  humanities  where 
open  questions  will  always  excite  hope  and  fear.  We  must 
learn  to  interpret  the  heart  and  our  native  instincts  as  truthfully 
as  we  do  external  nature,  for  our  happiness  in  life  depends  quite 
as  largely  upon  bringing  our  beliefs  into  harmony  with  the 
deeper  feelings  of  our  nature  as  it  does  upon  the  ability  to  adapt 
ourselves  to  our  physical  environment.  Thus  not  only  all  re- 
ligious beliefs  and  moral  acts  will  strengthen  if  they  truly  ex- 
press the  character  instead  of  cultivating  affectation  and  insin- 
cerity in  opinion,  word,  and  deed,  as  with  mistaken  pedagogic 
methods  they  so  commonly  do.  This  latter  can  be  avoided  only 
by  leaving  all  to  naturalism  and  spontaneity  at  first,  and  feeding 
the  soul  only  according  to  its  appetites  and  stage  of  growth. 
No  religious  truth  must  be  taught  as  fundamental — especially 
as  fundamental  to  morality — which  can  be  seriously  doubted  or 
even  misunderstood.  Yet  it  must  be  expected  that  convictions 
will  be  transformed  and  worked  over  and  over  again,  and  only 
late,  if  at  all,  will  an  equilibrium  between  the  heart  and  the 
truth  it  clings  to  as  finally  satisfying  be  attained.  Hence  most 
positive  instruction  in  Christian  truth  should  be  delayed  at  the 
very  least  to  the  first  school  year.  Many  things  must  come  of 
course  incidentally.  These  should  be  taught  only  when  de- 
manded and  in  the  briefest  possible  way,  and  with  the  feeling 
impressed  upon  the  child  that  these  are  most  serious  things,  but 
too  high  for  it  yet.  This  will  stimulate  curiosity  for  them  later. 
Up  to  this  age,  at  the  very  least,  the  child  should  not  be  encour- 
aged in  church-going  or  public  piety  of  any  sort.  If  permitted 
at  all  it  should  be  only  as  a reward,  but  is  dangerous  lest 
sacred  things  become  familiar  and  conventionalized  before  they 
are  felt  or  understood. 

So  long  as  the  child’s  parents  supply  the  place  of  Providence 
to  it,  and  before  its  wishes  and  desires  expand  beyond  the 
domestic  circle,  it  is  only  a pretty  affectation  to  cultivate  a sense 
of  very  great  intimacy  with  the  Heavenly  Father.  To  feel  its 
inmost  thought  watched  by  a divine  eye  will  only  tend  to  foster 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OR  CHILDREN.  39 


self-consciousness,  or  a morbid  and  precocious  conscientiousness, 
or  at  best  the  forms  of  conventional  morality,  while  its  concep- 
tions of  God’s  nature  will  be  inadequate  even  to  the  verge  of 
idolatry,  and  perhaps  forever  dwarfed  by  childish  associations. 
The  child’s  real  communion  with  God  is  in  fact  far  too  immedi- 
ate and  inward  to  be  more  than  faintly  typified  by  any  forms 
of  conscious  worship  which  it  can  share.  It  is  the  being  of  a 
precociously  and  wrongly  apprehended  God  which  soon  comes 
to  need  proofs  of  his  existence ; and  perhaps,  as  Lotze  says, 
men  were  mistaken  when  they  thought  they  had  done  well  in 
raising  God  from  that  region  where  he  is  clung  to  by  the  whole 
soul  with  all  its  spontaneous  energy,  and  conferring  on  him  the 
honor  of  exactly  demonstrating  his  existence.  There  is  a sense, 
altho  it  seems  more  indefinite  and  general  than  Lessing  thought, 
in  which  the  stages  of  a child’s  mental  growth  repeat  the  expe- 
rience of  the  race.  The  idea  of  God  is  not  flashed  in  upon  the 
infant  mind  complete  and  vivid  at  first  by  any  native  intuitions. 
It  can  be  realized  in  a natural  way  only  after  the  necessity  of  a 
cause  is  felt  to  be  general,  or  when  the  demand  for  a unity  and 
centre  of  things  in  the  wide  and  varied  world  arises.  The  child’s 
conception  of  God  should  not  be  personal  or  too  familiar  at  first , 
but  he  should  appear  distant  and  vague,  inspiring  awe  and  rever- 
ence far  more  than  love  ; in  a word,  as  the  God  of  nature  rather 
than  as  devoted  to  serviceable  ministrations  to  the  child’s  indi- 
vidual wants.  The  latter  should  be  taught  to  be  “a  faithful  ser- 
vant rather  than  a favorite  of  God.”  The  inestimable  pedagogic 
value  of  the  God-idea  consists  in  that  it  widens  the  child’s 
glimpse  of  the  whole,  and  gives  the  first  presentiment  of  the  uni- 
versality of  laws,  such  as  are  observed  in  their  experiences  and 
others,  so  that  all  things  seem  comprehended  under  one  stable 
system  or  government.  The  slow  realization  that  God’s  laws 
are  not  like  those  of  parents  and  teachers,  evadable,  suspendable, 
and  their  infraction  perhaps  pardoned,  but  changeless,  pitiless, 
and  their  penalties  sure  as  the  laws  of  nature,  is  a most  important 
factor  of  moral  training,  more  Jewish  perhaps  than  Christian, 
more  scientific  it  may  be  said  than  evangelical,  but  a factor  too 
noble  to  be  obscured  or  suppressed,  or  prematurely  superseded 
as  it  often  practically  is  by  the  notion  of  God  as  a fond  and  too 
indulgent  Heavenly  Parent,  like  the  father  or  mother  swayed 


40 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IK 


by  foolish  childish  petitions  and  always  ready  and  longing  to 
forgive.  First  the  law,  the  schoolmaster,  then  the  Gospel  ; 
first  nature,  then  grace,  is  the  order  of  growth.  That  child  is 
unfortunate  which  has  never  seen  its  mother  or  its  father  pray, 
but  it  does  not  follow  that  it  should  be  encouraged  to  frequent 
child-prayer-meetings. 

The  pains  or  pleasures  which  follow  many  acts  are  imme- 
diate, while  the  results  that  follow  others  are  so  remote  or 
so  serious  that  the  child  must  utilize  the  experience  of  others. 
Artificial  rewards  and  punishments  must  be  cunningly  devised 
so  as  to  simulate  and  typify  as  closely  as  possible  the  real 
natural  penalty,  and  they  must  be  administered  uniformly  and 
impartially  like  laws  of  nature.  As  command  are  just,  and 
as  they  are  gradually  perceived  to  spring  from  superior  wis- 
dom, respect  arises,  which  Kant  called  the  bottom  motive  of 
duty,  and  defined  as  the  immediate  determination  of  the  will 
by  law,  thwarting  self-love.  Here  the  child  reverences  what 
is  not  understood  as  authority,  and  to  the  childish  “why?” 
which  always  implies  imperfect  respect  for  the  authority,  how- 
ever displeasing  its  behest,  the  teacher  or  parent  should  always 
reply,  “You  cannot  understand  why  yet,”  unless  quite  sure 
that  a convincing  and  controlling  insight  can  be  given,  such  as 
shall  make  all  future  exercise  of  authority  in  this  particular  un- 
necessary. From  this  standpoint  the  great  importance  of  the 
character  and  native  dignity  of  the  teacher  is  best  seen.  Daily 
contact  with  some  teachers  is  itself  all-sided  ethical  education 
for  the  child  without  a spoken  precept.  Here,  too,  the  real 
advantage  of  male  over  female  teachers,  especially  for  boys,  is 
seen  in  their  superior  physical  strength,  which  often,  if  highly 
estimated,  gives  real  dignity  and  commands  real  respect,  and 
especially  in  the  unquestionably  greater  uniformity  of  their 
moods  and  their  discipline. 

During  the  first  four  or  five  years  of  school  life  the  point  of 
prime  importance  in  ethico-religious  training  is  the  education  of 
conscience.  This  latter  is  the  most  complex  and  perhaps  the 
most  educable  of  all  our  so-called  “ faculties.”  A system  of 
carefully  arranged  talks,  with  copious  illustrations  from  history 
and  literature,  about  such  topics  as  fair  play,  slang,  cronies,  dress, 
teasing,  getting  mad,  prompting  in  class,  white  lies,  affectation, 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  41 

cleanliness,  order,  honor,  taste,  self-respect,  treatment  of  animals, 
reading,  vacation,  pursuits,  etc.,  can  be  brought  quite  within 
the  range  of  boy-and-girl  interests  by  a sympathetic  and  tactful 
teacher,  and  be  made  immediately  and  obviously  practical. 
All  this  is  nothing  more  nor  less  than  conscience-building.  The 
old  superstition  that  children  have  innate  faculties  of  such  a 
finished  sort  that  they  flash  up  and  grasp  the  principle  of  things 
by  a rapid  sort  of  first  “ intellection,”  an  error  that  made  all 
departments  of  education  so  trivial,  assumptive  and  dogmatic  for 
centuries  before  Comenius,  Basedow  and  Pestalozzi,  has  been 
banished  everywhere  save  from  moral  and  religious  training, 
where  it  still  persists  in  full  force.  The  senses  develop  first, 
and  all  the  higher  intuitions  called  by  the  collective  name  of 
conscience  gradually  and  later  in  life.  They  first  take  the  form 
of  sentiments  without  much  insight,  and  are  hence  liable  to  be 
unconscious  affectation,  and  are  caught  insensibly  from  the  en- 
vironment with  the  aid  of  inherited  predisposition,  and  only 
made  more  definite  by  such  talks  as  the  above.  But  parents 
are  prone  to  forget  that  healthful  and  correct  sentiments  con- 
cerning matters  of  conduct  are  at  first  very  feeble,  and  that  the 
sense  of  obligation  needs  the  long  and  careful  guardianship  of 
external  authority.  Just  as  a young  medical  student  with  a 
rudimentary  notion  of  physiology  and  hygiene  is  sometimes 
disposed  to  undertake  a more  or  less  complete  reform  of  his 
diet,  regimen,  etc.,  to  make  it  “ scientific”  in  a way  that  an 
older  and  a more  learned  physician  would  shrink  from,  so  the 
half-insights  of  boys  into  matters  of  moral  regimen  are  far  too 
apt,  in  the  American  temperament,  to  expend,  in  precocious 
emancipation  and  crude  attempts  at  practical  realization,  the 
force  which  is  needed  to  bring  their  insights  to  maturity.  Au- 
thority should  be  relaxed  gradually,  explicitly,  and  provisionally 
over  one  definite  department  of  conduct  at  a time.  To  dis- 
tinguish right  and  wrong  in  their  own  nature  is  the  highest  and 
most  complex  of  intellectual  processes.  Most  men  and  all 
children  are  guided  only  by  associations  of  greater  or  lpss  sub- 
tlety. Perhaps  the  whole  round  of  human  duties  might  be 
best  taught  by  gathering  illustrations  of  selfishness  and  tracing 
it  in  its  countless  disguises  and  ramifications  through  every 
stage  of  life.  Selfishness  is  opposed  to  a sense  of  the  infinite 


42 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


and  is  inversely  as  real  religion,  and  the  study  of  it  is  not,  like 
systematic  ethics,  apt  to  be  confused  and  made  unpractical  by 
conflicting  theories. 

The  Bible,  the  great  instrument  in  the  education  of  con- 
science, is  far  less  juvenile  than  it  is  now  the  fashion  to  suppose. 
At  the  very  least  it  expresses  the  result  of  the  ripest  human 
experience,  the  noblest  traditions  of  humanity.  Old  Testament 
history,  even  more  than  most  very  ancient  history,  is  distilled  to 
an  almost  purely  ethical  content.  For  centuries  Scripture  was 
withheld  from  the  masses  for  the  same  reason  that  Plato  refused 
at  first  to  put  his  thoughts  into  writing,  because  it  would  be 
sure  to  be  misunderstood  by  very  many  and  lead  to  that  worst 
of  errors  and  fanaticism  caused  by  half-truths.  Children  should 
not  approach  it  too  lightly.  It  might  seem  that  doctrinal  cate- 
chisms were  the  most  unpedagogic  methods  of  approach,  but  a 
more  baleful  one  has  been  developed  in  the  ardor  of  those  Sun- 
day-school teachers  who  require  devotion  in  their  closet  as  the 
chief  means  of  preparation,  and  go  tingling  with  the  self- 
consciousnesS  which  is  the  bane  of  American  childhood  to 
inoculate  their  classes  with  their  own  neurological  states.  Belief 
is  actually  made  a duty;  and  as  if  that,  as  too  often  taught, 
were  not  enough  to  stultify  conscience,  it  is  made  the  supreme 
duty  and  a condition  of  salvation  even  for  children. 

The  Old  Testament,  rather  than  the  New,  is  the  Bible  for 
childhood.  A good,  protracted  course  of  the  law  must  peda- 
gogically  prepare  the  way  for  the  apprehension  of  the  Gospel. 
Even  for  the  Old  Testament,  a propaedeutic  selection  of  the 
choicest  moral  tales  from  Catholic  legends,  classic  and  Hindoo 
mythology,  ancient  myths  and  fables,  German  mdrchen,  and  per- 
haps from  the  Bibles  of  other  religions,  etc.,  should  serve  as  a 
sort  of  introduction.  What  a Sunday-school  library  might  be 
gradually  developed  from  such  sources,  in  place  of  the  trashy  and 
even  pathological  matter  so  commonly  in  use  ! Then  the  study 
of  the  Old  Testament  should  begin  with  selected  tales,  told,  as 
in  the  German  schools,  impressively,  in  the  teacher’s  language, 
but  objectively,  and  without  exegetical  or  hortatory  comment. 
The  appeal  is  directly  to  the  understanding  only  at  first,  but  the 
moral  lesson  is  brought  clearly  and  surely  within  the  child’s 
reach,  but  not  personally  applied  after  the  manner  common  with 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  43 

us.  In  that  country  only  clergymen  who  have  passed  a special 
examination  for  that  purpose  are  allowed  to  teach  the  Bible  to 
children.  This  is  done  in  the  schools  in  a way  so  impressive 
that  the  knowledge  of  the  Bible  possessed  by  the  average  Ger- 
man child  of  the  age  of  confirmation  is  infinitely  better  than 
that  acquired  by  the  best  children  under  our  uniform  lesson  sys- 
tem. The  causes  of  unbelief  in  that  country  are  not  found  in 
what  precedes  that  age,  but  may  be  due  in  part  to  the  fact  that 
Bible  study  generally  ceases  then  for  life.  The  Old  Testament 
is  from  beginning  to  end  one  long  and  impressive  argument  in 
favor  of  the  practical  wisdom  of  righteousness  as  a condition  of 
personal  welfare  and  national  stability — a lesson  not  untimely 
now,  and  in  our  land.  This  lesson  must  be  thoroughly  and  pro- 
tractedly taught  before  the  sublime  altruistic  stand-point  of  the 
New  Testament  can  be  apprehended.  Up  to  this  point  the  es- 
sential training  of  Jewish,  Catholic,  and  Protestant  children  now 
differs  only  in  method  and  detail,  and  it  seems  by  no  means 
impossible  that  a portion  of  this  common  element  may  be  some 
time  mutually  agreed  upon,  and  even  taught  in  public  schools 
by  common  consent  and  with  the  real  advantage  of  superior 
methods  to  all. 

Probably  the  most  important  changes  for  the  educator  to 
study  are  those  which  take  place  between  the  ages  of  twelve  and 
sixteen,  when  the  young  adolescent  receives  from  nature  a new 
capital  of  energy  and  altruistic  feeling.  It  is  a veritable  second 
birth,  and  success  in  life  depends  upon  the  care  and  wisdom 
with  which  this  energy  is  husbanded.  These  changes  constitute 
a natural  predisposition  to  a change  of  heart,  and  may  perhaps 
be  called,  in  Kantian  phrase,  its  schema.  Even  from  the  psycho- 
physic stand-point  it  is  a correct  instinct  which  has  slowly  led  so 
large  a section  of  the  Christian  church  to  centre  its  entire  cultus 
upon  regeneration.  In  this  I of  course  only  assert  the  neuro- 
physical  side,  which  is  everywhere  present,  tho  everywhere 
subordinate  to  the  spiritual  side.  As  everywhere,  too,  the 
physical  is  regulative  rather  than  constitutive.  It  is  .therefore 
not  surprising  that  statistics  show — so  far  as  I have  yet  been 
able  to  collect  them  — that  far  more  conversions,  pro  rata , 
take  place  during  the  adolescent  period,  which,  according  to 
the  best  authorities,  does  not  normally  end  before  the  age 


44 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


of  twenty  four  or  five,  than  during  any  other  period  of  equal 
length. 

Before  this  age  the  child  lives  in  the  present,  is  normally 
selfish,  deficient  in  sympathy,  but  frank  and  confidential,  obe- 
dient upon  authority,  and  without  affection  save  the  supreme 
affection  of  childhood,  viz.,  assuming  the  words,  manners, 
habits,  etc.,  of  those  older  than  itself.  But  now  stature  sud- 
denly increases,  and  the  power  of  physical  endurance  dimin- 
ishes for  a time ; larynx,  nose,  chin  change,  and  normal  and 
morbid  ancestral  traits  and  features  appear.  Far  greater,  more 
protracted,  tho  unseen,  are  the  changes  which  take  place 
in  the  nervous  system,  to  which  it  seems  as  if  for  a few 
years  the  energies  of  growth  were  chiefly  directed.  Hence  this 
period  is  so  critical  and  changes  in  character  so  rapid.  No 
matter  how  confidential  the  relations  with  the  parent  may  have 
been,  an  important  domain  of  the  soul  now  becomes  independ- 
ent. Confidences  are  shared  with  those  of  equal  age  and  with- 
held from  parents,  especially  by  boys,  to  an  extent  probably 
little  suspected  by  most  parents.  Education  must  be  addressed 
to  freedom,  which  recognizes  only  self-made  law,  and  spontaneity 
of  opinion  and  conduct  is  manifested,  often  in  extravagant  and 
grotesque  forms.  There  is  now  a longing  for  that  kind  of  close 
sympathy  and  friendship  which  makes  cronies  and  intimates ; 
there  is  a craving  for  strong  emotions  which  gives  pleasure  in 
exaggerations ; and  there  are  nameless  longings  for  what  is  far, 
remote,  strange,  which  emphasizes  the  self-estrangement  which 
Hegel  so  well  describes,  and  which  marks  the  normal  rise  of  the 
presentment  of  something  higher  than  self.  Instincts  of  rivalry 
and  competition  now  first  naturally  arise  in  boys,  and  girls  grow 
more  conscientious,  and  begin  to  feel  their  music,  painting,  etc., 
and  to  realize  the  bearing  of  these  upon  their  future  adult  life. 
There  is  often  a strong  instinct  of  devotion  and  self-sacrifice 
toward  some,  perhaps  almost  any,  object  or  in  almost  any  cause 
which  circumstances  may  present.  It  is  never  so  hard  to  tell 
the  truth  plainly  and  objectively  and  without  any  subjective 
twist.  The  life  of  the  mere  individual  ceases  and  that  of  per- 
son, of  the  race,  begins.  Many  relations  of  things  which  hitherto 
seemed  independent  are  seen.  It  is  a period  of  realization,  and 
hence  often  of  introspection.  It  is  the  golden  age  of  life,  in 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  45 


which  enthusiasm,  sympathy,  generosity,  and  curiosity  are  at 
their  strongest  and  best,  and  when  growth  is  so  rapid  that,  e.g., 
each  college  class  is  conscious  of  a vast  interval  of  development 
which  separates  it  from  the  class  below ; but  it  is  also  a period 
subject  to  Wertherian  crises,  such  as  Hume,  Richter,  J.  S.  Mill, 
and  others  passed  through,  and  all  depends  on  the  direction 
given  to  these  new  forces. 

The  dangers  of  this  period  are  great  and  manifest.  The 
chief  of  these,  far  greater  even  than  the  dangers  of  intemper- 
ance, is  that  the  sexual  elements  of  soul  and  body  will  be 
developed  prematurely  and  disproportionately.  Probably  the 
greatest  and  most  experienced  living  teacher  of  physiology 
has  expressed  the  opinion  that  at  least  nine  tenths  of  the 
thoughts,  feelings,  imaginations  of  the  average  male  adolescent 
centre  for  a few  early  years  of  this  period  about  this  factor  of 
his  nature.  Quite  apart,  therefore,  from  its  intrinsic  value,  educa- 
tion should  serve  the  purpose  of  preoccupation,  and  should 
divert  attention  from  an  element  of  our  nature  the  premature 
or  excessive  development  of  which  dwarfs  every  part  of  soul 
and  body.  Intellectual  interests,  athleticism,  social  and  aesthetic 
tastes,  should  be  cultivated.  There  should  be  some  change  in 
external  life.  Previous  routine  and  drill-work  must  be  broken 
through  and  new  occupations  resorted  to,  that  the  mind  may 
not  be  left  idle  while  the  hands  are  mechanically  employed. 
Attractive  home-life,  friendship  well  chosen  and  on  a high  plane, 
and  regular  habits,  should  of  course  be  cultivated.  Now,  too, 
tho  the  intellect  is  not  frequently  judged  insane,  so  that  pubes- 
cent insanity  is  comparatively  rare,  the  feelings,  which  are  yet 
more  fundamental  to  mental  sanity,  are  most  often  perverted, 
and  lack  of  emotional  steadiness,  violent  and  dangerous  im- 
pulses, unreasonable  conduct,  lack  of  enthusiasm  and  sympathy, 
are  very  commonly  caused  by  abnormities  here.  Neurotic  dis- 
turbances, such  as  hysteria,  chorea,  and,  in  the  opinion  of  some, 
sick-headache,  are  peculiarly  liable  to  appear  and  become  seated 
during  this  period.  In  short,  the  previous  selfhood  i9  broken 
up  like  the  regulation  copy  handwriting  of  early  school  years, 
and  a new  individual  is  in  process  of  crystallization.  All  is 
solvent,  plastic,  peculiarly  susceptible  to  external  influences. 

Between  love  and  religion  God  and  nature  have  wrought  a 


46 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


strong  and  indissoluble  bond.  Even  Plato,  in  the  symposium, 
teaches  this  very  impressively.  Change  of  heart  before  pubes- 
cent years  is  the  most  disastrous  of  all  precocities  and  forcings. 
The  age  signalized  by  the  ancient  Greeks  as  that  at  which  the 
study  of  what  was  comprehensively  called  music  should  begin, 
the  age  at  which  Roman  guardianship  ended,  as  explained  by 
Sir  Henry  Maine,  at  which  boys  are  confirmed  in  the  modern 
Greek,  Catholic,  and  Lutheran  churches,  and  at  which  the  child 
J esus  entered  the  temple,  is  as  early  as  any  child  ought  to  go  about 
his  heavenly  Father’s  business.  “ It  did  not  seem  tome  modest 
for  my  daughter  to  hear,”  said  a cultivated  and  devout  German 
mother,  explaining  why  she  had  sent  her  twelve-year-old  daugh- 
ter from  the  room  while  I was  describing  revival  scenes  I had 
witnessed  in  this  country.  If  children  are  instructed  in  the 
language  of  these  sentiments  too  early,  the  all-sided  deepening 
and  broadening  of  soul  and  of  conscience  which  should  come  with 
adolescent  years  will  be  incomplete.  Revival  sermons  to  young 
children  are  analogous  to  exhorting  them  to  imagine  themselves 
married  people  and  inculcating  the  duties  of  that  relation.  It  is 
because  this  precept  is  violated  in  the  intemperate  haste  for 
immediate  results  that  we  may  so  often  hear  childish  sentiments 
and  puerile  expressions  so  strangely  mingled  in  the  religious 
experience  of  otherwise  apparently  mature  adults,  which  remind 
one  of  a male  voice  constantly  modulating  from  manly  tones 
into  boyish  falsetto.  Some  one  has  said  of  very  early  risers 
that  they  were  apt  to  be  conceited  all  the  forenoon,  and  stupid 
and  uninteresting  all  the  afternoon  and  evening.  So,  too,  pre- 
cocious infant  Christians  are  apt  to  be  conceited  and  full  of 
pious  affectations  all  the  forenoon  of  life,  and  thereafter  com- 
monplace enough  in  their  religious  life.  One  is  reminded  of 
Aristotle’s  theory  of  Katharsis,  according  to  which  the  soul  was 
purged  of  strong  or  bad  passions  by  listening  to  vivid  representa- 
tions of  them  on  the  stage.  So,  by  the  forcing  method  we  de- 
precate, the  soul  is  given  just  enough  religious  stimulus  to  act 
as  inoculation  against  deeper  and  more  serious  interest  later. 
At  this  age  the  prescription  of  a series  of  strong  feelings  is  very 
apt  to  cause  attention  to  concentrate  on  physical  states  in  a way 
which  may  culminate  in  the  increased  activity  of  the  passional 
nature,  or  may  induce  that  sort  of  self-flirtation  which  is  ex- 


MORAL  AND  RELIGIOUS  TRAINING  OF  CHILDREN.  47 

pressed  in  morbid  love  of  autobiographic  confessional  outpour- 
ings, or  may  issue  in  the  supreme  selfishness  of  incipient  and^ 
often  unsuspected  hysteria.  God,  Scripture,  etc.,  cannot  seem 
supreme  unless  taught  most  vigorously  near  the  end  rather  than 
near  the  beginning  of  the  educational  course.  Reference  to 
these  should  be  after  we  have  thought  and  investigated  and  ap- 
plied our  faculties  to  their  uttermost,  rather  than  before.  Those 
who  are  led  to  Christ  normally  by  obeying  conscience  are  not 
apt  to  endanger  the  foundation  of  their  moral  character  if  they 
should  later  chance  to  doubt  the  doctrine  of  verbal  inspiration 
or  some  of  the  miracles,  or  even  get  confused  about  the  Trinity, 
because  their  religious  nature  is  not  built  on  the  sand.  The  art 
of  leading  young  men  through  college  without  unsettling  any 
of  the  religious  notions  of  childhood  is  anti-pedagogic  and  un- 
worthy philosophy,  and  is  to  leave  men  puerile  in  the  highest 
department  of  their  nature. 

At  the  age  we  have  indicated,  when  the  young  man  instinc- 
tively takes  the  control  of  himself  into  his  own  hands,  previous 
ethico-religious  training  should  be  brought  to  a focus  and  given 
a personal  application,  which,  to  be  most  effective,  should  be 
according  to  the  creed  of  the  parent.  It  is  a serious  and  solemn 
epoch,  and  ought  to  be  fittingly  signalized.  Morality  now  needs 
religion,  which  cannot  have  affected  life  much  before.  Now  du- 
ties should  be  recognized  as  divine  commands,  for  the  strongest 
motives,  natural  and  supernatural,  are  needed  for  the  regulation 
of  the  new  impulses,  passions,  desires,  half-insights,  ambitions, 
etc.'  which  come  to  the  American  temperament  so  suddenly 
before  the  methods  of  self-regulation  can  become  established 
and  operative.  Now  a deep  personal  sense  of  purity  and  im- 
purity are  first  possible,  and  indeed  inevitable,  and  this  natural 
moral  tension  is  a great  opportunity  to  the  religious  teacher.  A 
serious  sense  of  God  within,  and  of  responsibilities  which  tran- 
scend this  life  as  they  do  the  adolescent’s  power  of  comprehen- 
sion ; a feeling  for  duties  deepened  by  a realization  and  expe- 
rience of  their  conflict  such  as  some  have  thought  to  -be  the 
origin  of  religion  itself  in  the  soul, — these,  too,  are  elements  of 
the  “theology  of  the  heart”  revealed  at  this  age  to  every  serious 
youth,  but  to  the  judicious  emphasis  and  utilization  of  which 
the  teacher  should  lend  his  consummate  skill. 


4S 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


Finally,  there  is  danger  lest  this  change,  as  prescribed  and 
formulated  by  the  church,  be  too  sudden  and  violent,  and  the 
'capital  of  moral  force  which  should  last  a lifetime  be  consumed 
in  a brief,  convulsive  effort,  like  the  sudden  running  down  of  a 
watch  if  its  spring  be  broken.  Piety  is  naturally  the  slowest 
because  the  most  comprehensive  kind  of  growth.  Quetelet  says 
that  the  measure  of  the  state  of  civilization  in  a nation  is  the 
way  in  which  it  achieves  its  revolutions.  As  it  becomes  truly 
civilized  revolutions  cease  to  be  sudden  and  violent,  and  become 
gradually  transitory  and  without  abrupt  change.  The  same  is 
true  of  that  individual  crisis  which  psycho-physiology  describes 
as  adolescence,  and  of  which  theology  formulates  a higher  spirit- 
ual potency  as  conversion.  The  adolescent  period  lasts  ten 
years  or  more,  during  all  of  which  development  of  every  sort  is 
very  rapid  and  constant,  and  it  is,  as  already  remarked,  intem- 
perate haste  for  immediate  results,  of  reaping  without  sowing, 
which  has  made  so  many  regard  change  of  heart  as  an  instan- 
taneous conquest  rather  than  as  a growth,  and  persistently  to 
forget  that  there  is  something  of  importance  before  and  after  it 
in  healthful  Christian  experience. 


G.  Stanley  Hall. 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


LL  people  interested  in  the  state  of  opinion  know  that 


there  met  at  Concord,  in  the  middle  of  July  last,  a com- 
pany of  very  high-souled  men  and  women  who  held  high  con- 
verse with  one  another,  and  with  high  theories,  till  the  middle 
of  August.  I was  politely  asked  to  join  them,  albeit  they  knew 
I was  not  one  of  them.  With  great  delicacy  of  feeling  they 
proposed  to  me  a theme  in  which  it  was  supposed  I would  be 
specially  interested,  the  Scottish  philosophy,  in  which  I was 
reared  and  to  which  I adhere,  not,  however,  in  all  its  doctrines, 
but  simply  in  its  method,  which  discovers  truths  prior  in  their 
nature  to  the  induction  which  discovers  them,  and  which  indeed 
could  not  discover  them  unless  they  were  already  there  in  the 
mind.  I regarded  it  at  the  time,  and  still  regard  it,  as  a misfor- 
tune to  me  that,  owing  to  an  old  standing  obligation  to  go  else- 
where, I was  not  able  to  accept  their  invitation. 

Those  who  met  were  drawn  together  by  a common  faith  and 
sentiment  not  easily  defined  (the  school  is  not  much  inclined  to 
lay  restraints  on  itself  by  definition),  yet  noticeable  by  all.  They 
constitute  a school  quite  as  much  so  as  the  ancient  Pythago- 
reans, the  Platonists,  and  Neoplatonists,  with  whom  they  have 
certain  interesting  affinities.  They  believe  in  mind  as  infinitely 
higher  than  matter, — some  of  them  believe  in  matter  simply  as 
a veil  thrown  over  mind.  They  are  sure  that  in  mind  there  is 
vastly  more  than  sense,  than  sight  or  touch  or  hearing.  Some 
of  them  would  burst  the  bounds  of  space  and  time,  which  do  so 
hem  us  in,  and  go  out  into  the  eternal,  the  infinite,  the  absblute. 
They  are  seeking  to  mount  to  a sphere  far  above  the  mundane, 
and  if  they  do  not  rise  to  the  sky,  which  is  apt  to  become  ever 
more  remote  as  we  ascfend,  they  at  least,  as  in  a balloon,  reach 


4 


50 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


the  clouds,  whence,  as  the  traveller  in  the  Alps,  they  gain  grand 
views  of  the  heavens  above  them  and  lovely  views  of  the  green 
vales  below  them. 

They  are  all  aspiring  after  an  excellence  which  they  do  not 
find  in  the  busy  pursuits  and  attractive  fashions  of  the  world ; 
nor  even  in  its  literature  and  its  science,  in  its  newspapers  and 
its  novels,  which  seem  to  them  to  have  too  much  of  the  clay  of 
the  earth  sticking  to  them,  and  to  be  all  too  much  held  down 
by  terrestrial  gravity.  They  are  longing  and  seeking  for  some- 
thing higher  and  better  for  themselves  and  for  the  community. 
All  of  them  are  utterly  opposed  to  materialism  under  every 
form.  A number  are  driven  to  Concord  under  the  influence  of 
a recoiling  wave  opposed  to  the  whole  secular  spirit  of  the  age. 
They  feel  that  even  physical  science,  as  the  mere  co-ordination 
of  material  and  ever-changing  objects,  cannot  satisfy  the  crav- 
ings of  the  soul.  Most  of  them  adopt  the  Christian  religion  on 
the  same  ground  as  many  of  the  Platonists  did  in  the  second 
century,  as  in  consonance  with  their  lofty  philosophic  ideas. 
Others  rather  turn  away  from  it  as  the  Neoplatonists  in  Alex- 
andria did,  because  (as  shown  so  graphically  in  Kingsley’s 
“ Hypatia”)  it  is  too  definite  in  its  precepts  and  statements 
of  fact  and  doctrine.  Some  of  them,  in  accepting  it,  adapt  it 
to  their  tastes  and  make  it  a cloud  lowered  from  heaven  to 
earth,  and  embracing  in  it  Buddhism  and  all  religions  with  their 
acknowledged  errors  because  containing  so  much  truth.  A few 
of  them  are  disposed  to  believe  in  spiritual  media  and  rope- 
tying — just  as  their  prototypes  among  the  Alexandrian  Neo- 
platonists did  in  magic  and  necromancy,  as  bringing  heaven  into 
close  connection  with  earth. 

Most  appropriately  the  association  met  at  Concord.  The 
place,  with  its  three  thousand  dwellers,  is  in  the  level  country 
as  it  swells  towards  the  mountain  country  to  which  it  looks  up. 
It  is  a characteristic  New  England  village,  only  it  has  been  asso- 
ciated with  more  men  and  women  of  real  genius  than  any  like 
place  in  America:  with  Hawthorne  and  his  weird  fancies;  with 
Margaret  Fuller1  and  her  enthusiastic  and  fascinating  talks; 

1 Julia  Ward  Howe  tells  us  “ Margaret  Fuller  once  said  that  she  accepted  the 
universe,  and  Carlyle  laughed  heartily  on  hearing  it,  and  said,  ‘ I think  she’d 
better.’  ” 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


51 


with  Thoreau  and  his  wild-bird  wood-notes ; with  Ripley  and 
his  high  Coleridgean  criticisms.  Alcott  and  Emerson,  thank 
God,  are  still  spared  to  gather  their  pebbles  from  the  plains  and 
to  scatter  them  ungrudgingly.  These  two  may  be  regarded  as 
the  true  fathers  and  founders  of  the  school,  and  their  children 
are  proud  of  them.  They  were  not  able  to  take  a very  promi- 
nent part  at  the  meetings,  but  they  looked  in  upon  them  (Alcott 
occasionally  spoke  with  his  old  glow),  and  were  welcomed  with 
profound  respect  and  warm  affection,  as  well  they  might  be. 
From  this  place  Mr.  Alcott  years  ago  stretched  out  his  arms 
to  embrace  Buddha  and  all  Asia  in  his  wide  religious  creed.  It 
is  understood  that  latterly  he  has  lost  all  partiality  for  bald 
Unitarianism,  and  has  returned  to  the  faith  of  the  Episcopal 
Church.  Here  Emerson  has  strung  his  lovely  pearls  often  on 
slender  strings  and  woven  them  into  a rich  necklace.  The 
meeting  was  honored  with  the  presence  of  Mr.  Stedman,  who 
composed  the  poem  “ Corda  Concordia”  (a  considerably  labored 
composition),  than  whom  we  have  not  a finer  critic  of  high 
poetry  in  this  country,  Mr.  Sanborn,  besides  reading  some  lit- 
erary papers,  was  the  instrument  of  bringing  together  the  men 
and  women  of  kindred  tastes  from  various  States  of  the  Union. 
The  association  has  had  a most  important  accession  to  it  by  the 
removal  of  Dr.  Harris  from  St.  Louis  to  Concord.  If  I mistake 
not,  he  will  henceforth  be  the  leader  of  the  sect.  It  is  expected 
that  he  will  be  the  philosopher  of  the  school,  and  give  it  organi- 
zation and  system  ; and  if  so,  it  will  become  more  philosophi- 
cal and  less  poetical,  and  possibly  thereby  less  attractive  in  the 
eyes  of  some  who  love  to  wander  in  the  wayless  and  to  gaze  on 
gilded  clouds. 

It  might  be  curious,  and  very  instructive  withal,  to  have  laid 
bare  to  us  the  past  experience  in  thought  and  belief  and  feeling 
of  those  who  met  together  and  spoke  and  listened.  But  we 
have  no  means  of  ascertaining  this,  no  right  to  pry  into  it. 
Some  of  the  older  men,  we  know,  were  loosened  from  the  old 
faith  and  trained  in  another  faith  by  Channing,  who  had' such 
influence  in  Boston  an  age  ago.  Most  appropriately  an  even- 
ing was  devoted  to  talk  of  his  merits,  and  the  conference  was 
led  by  Mr.  Hazard.  The  school  of  Channing  (in  this  respect, 
but  in  no  other,  like  the  school  of  Hegel)  has  divided  into  three 


52 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


streams.  There  is  the  Middle  division,  faithfully  keeping  to  the 
position  of  Channing  himself.  They  are  a smali  body  of  men 
and  women  now  venerable  from  age,  dreadfully  alarmed  about 
the  wild  course  which  some  of  their  sons  are  pursuing,  and 
hesitating  whether  they  should  not  go  over  with  them  to  Dr. 
Brooks’s  church  to  save  them  from  utter  scepticism.  It  is  clear 
that  the  young  generation  will  not  stay  where  Channing  stayed, 
because  they  see  that  while  he  professed  to  follow  the  Scrip- 
tures, he  yet  preached  doctrines  palpably  inconsistent  with 
them.  The  party  of  the  Left  are  more  numerous  and  active. 
They  see  that  Unitarianism  cannot  be  drawn  from  the  Scrip- 
tures, of  which  they  have  let  go  their  hold,  and  are  descending 
into  the  barest  negation-s  of  all  belief,  and  running  a risk  of 
sliding  into  agnosticism  and  even  materialism ; the  ministers 
among  them  seeking  to  interest  and  keep  up  their  congrega- 
tions by  preaching  on  the  topics  of  the  times  and  not  on  those 
of  eternity.  Dr.  Frothingham,  late  of  New  York,  was  much 
troubled  with  them,  and  has  given  us  a graphic  description  of 
them  and  of  his  disgust  with  them ; and  has  ended  with  re- 
tiring from  the  active  ministry,  as  not  knowing  what  to  believe. 
The  Channingites  of  the  Right  are  of  a higher  class.  Channing 
himself  was  a man  of  high  moral  tone,  but  in  no  special  sense  a 
philosopher ; and  this  class  of  his  followers  feel  their  need  of  a 
deeper  foundation  to  rest  on,  and  came  in  considerable  force  to 
Concord  in  search  of  it.  They  feel  that  they  need  something 
more  soul-satisfying  than  Unitarianism,  and  yet  are  not  disposed 
to  go  back  to  the  old  orthodoxy.  Some  of  them  are  striving 
hard  to  believe  that  they  have  found  stable  rest  in  Plato,  in 
Kant,  or  in  Hegel. 

It  is  interesting  to  find  it  stated  that  at  the  meetings  there 
was  a larger  number  of  females — all  well  educated — than  of  men. 
It  is  also  a significant  fact  that  a considerable  number  of  na- 
tional teachers  did  thus  spend  their  weeks  of  vacation,  seeking 
profit  as  well  as  pleasure.  It  is  clear  that  there  are  in  the  coun- 
try inquiring  minds  seeking  for  something  higher  than  the  busi- 
ness and  fashions  of  the  world  can  give  them,  than  even  the 
science  of  the  day  can  furnish,  or  its  newspaper  literature  or  its 
state  school  lessons.  I am  not  sure  that  these  wishes  and  hopes 
were  fully  gratified  ; whether  the  food  dispensed  has  been  found 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


53 


to  be  as  solid  and  nourishing  in  the  mastication  and  digestion  as 
in  the  feeding  upon  it.  Some,  I know,  felt  that  the  philosophy 
taught  was  too  impersonal,  and  not  sufficiently  practical  to  meet 
the  wants  of  men,  women,  and  children  in  a world  of  struggle  and 
temptation,  of  suffering  and  of  sin. 

The  meeting  at  Concord  last  summer  is  worthy  of  being 
carefully  noted  by  thinking  minds.  It  is  true  that  the  country 
as  a whole  paid  little  attention  to  it.  The  public  press,  so  far  as 
they  observed  it,  did  so  with  a leer,  as  if  not  quite  sure  whether 
they  should  admire  it  or  amuse  themselves  with  it.  But  then 
it  is  true  that  the  world  has  never  noticed  at  the  time  the  oc- 
currences which  have  afterwards  produced  such  mighty  results ; 
the  seed  lying  in  the  ground  is  not  observed  till  it  springs  up 
simultaneously  in  the  whole  field.  It  may  be  doubted  whether, 
when  the  history  of  1 88 1 comes  to  be  written  by  some  future 
Bancroft,  the  meeting  at  Concord  will  have  even  a passing  no- 
tice. The  historian  will  dilate  on  the  assassination  of  Garfield 
and  the  madness  feigned  and  real  of  Guiteau,  on  the  sulks  of 
Conkling,  and  will  settle  it  for  us  whether  Grant  is  even  now 
counselling  with  the  President.  But  he  will  have  little  to  tell 
us  of  the  progress  made  by  the  grand  question  of  civil  reform — 
the  only  measure  fitted  to  save  us  from  the  tricks  of  miserable 
politicians — and  still  less  of  the  signs  of  the  deeper  thoughts  of 
the  country  as  not  just  accomplished  but  indicated  at  the  Con- 
cord meeting.  That  meeting,  particularly  the  success  so  far  of 
the  meeting,  has  its  significance.  It  was  a protest  against  a 
clamant  evil,  the  wide-spread  tendency  towards  materialism.  It 
expressed  a want  to  be  met  and  relieved,  and  a strong  desire  on 
the  part  of  a body  of  sincere  people  to  elevate  the  faiths  of  the 
country.  Questions  were  put  that  must  be  answered,  and  these 
ultimately  more  momentous  than  those  discussed  in  the  news- 
papers and  in  Congress. 

I am  of  opinion  that  the  influence  of  the  meeting  has,  upon 
the  whole,  been  for  good.  The  papers  read  were  of  a high 
order  both  in  thought  and  expression.  The  inclination  of 
everything  was  upwards — sometimes,  indeed,  only  the  flight  of 
a kite  which  will  have  to  come  down  again  when  the  wind  which 
bore  it  up  has  subsided.  There  was  a confessed  or  implied 
belief  in,  and  constant  appeal  to,  the  highest  ideas  which  the 


54 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


mind  of  man  can  entertain.  A high  ideal  of  some  kind  was  be- 
fore every  one.  I am  prepared  to  maintain  and  to  prove  that 
every  one  of  the  ideas  and  beliefs  to  which  they  were  appealing 
has  a place  in  the  mind  of  man,  and  has  in  itself  an  elevating 
tendency.  Such  are  the  ideas  of  the  true,  the  good,  the  beauti- 
ful, of  the  infinite,  the  lovely,  and  the  perfect.  It  is  good  to 
hold  up  these  before  the  eyes  of  the  men  of  the  world,  of  the 
worshippers  of  wealth,  of  the  votaries  of  fashion,  and  the  exclu- 
sive cultivators  of  natural  science.  They  are  all  realities  in  the 
mind,  quite  as  much  as  the  monkey,  the  cat,  the  newt,  and  the 
lamprey,  which  our  naturalists  are  studying  so  carefully,  are 
realities  without  the  mind.  The  speakers  at  Concord  did  not 
err  in  seeking  to  draw  attention  to  these  mental  realities.  But 
the  naturalists  who  have  lately  written  papers  on  the  animals 
named  have  not  assumed  beforehand  what  they  are,  but  have 
inquired  diligently  into  their  nature,  their  structure,  their  growth 
and  habits,  and  by  the  careful  observation  of  facts,  carried  on 
for  months  or  years,  and  by  searching  experiments  verifying 
the  hypotheses  or  theories  previously  formed.  The  great  defect 
of  the  members  of  the  Concord  school  is  that  they  assume, 
adopt,  and  apply  the  ideas  without  any  previous  scrutiny  of 
them  after  the  maieutic  manner  of  Socrates,  or  observational  in- 
duction of  them  after  the  method  of  Bacon. 

In  reading  these  papers  I often  wished  that  Socrates  had 
appeared  among  them.  Boston,  of  which  Concord  is  an  annex, 
has  often  been  called,  not  just  the  modern  Athens  (Edinburgh 
is  vain  enough  to  claim  that  title),  but  a modern  Athens.  It 
has  a distant  resemblance  to  that  ancient  city.  It  has  had 
orators  and  talkers,  poets  and  poetasters,  historians  and  story- 
tellers, journalists  and  critics,  literary  societies  and  cliques.  But 
strange  as  it  may  sound,  it  has  never  had  a Socrates — greatest 
man  in  the  greatest  nation  of  heathen  antiquity — one  whose 
function  was  to  search  every  kind  of  wisdom,  real  or  pretended. 
Had  there  been  such  a one  in  Boston,  he  would  certainly  have 
been  attracted  to  Concord  last  summer.  We  can  picture  him 
appearing  there  after  having  travelled  the  distance  on  foot, 
— certainly  I would  have  travelled  a thousand  miles  on  foot 
to  witness  the  scene.  I see  him  with  my  mind’s  eye  at  this 
moment,  “ with  that  Silenic  physiognomy,  with  that  grotesque 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


55 


manner,  with  that  indomitable  resolution,  with  that  captivating 
voice,  with  that  homely  humor,  with  that  solemn  earnestness, 
with  that  siege  of  questions.”  " Oh,”  says  Dean  Stanley,  “ for 
one  hour  of  Socrates ! Oh  for  one  hour  of  that  voice  which 
should  by  its  searching  cross-examination  make  men  see  what 
they  knew  and  what  they  did  not  know ; what  they  meant  and 
what  they  only  thought  they  meant ; what  they  believed  in 
truth  and  what  they  only  believed  in  name  ; wherein  they  agreed 
and  wherein  they  differed!” 

Had  he  appeared,  he  would  certainly  have  been  welcomed 
by  all,  even  by  the  few  in  secret  dread  of  his  cross-questioning. 
In  suasive  conversational  tone  he  would  have  begun  simply  and 
innocently  by  stating  that  for  himself  he  knew  nothing,  but 
learning  that  so  many  wise  men  had  met  he  had  come  seeking 
instruction.  He  might  then  have  taken  up  the  subject  discussed 
by  the  paper  just  read,  and  said  how  much  he  had  been  gratified 
with  it.  Having  thus  gained  favorable  ears,  he  would  now  put 
questions  so  easy  that  they  would  at  once  be  answered.  As  I 
am  not  that  Socrates,  I am  not  able  to  give  his  questionings. 
The  subject  might  be  the  pre-existence  of  the  soul  and  the  idea 
in  it,  as  discussed  in  the  Platonic  papers  by  Dr.  Jones,  or  the 
Hegelian  reality,  opposed  to  the  Kantian  formality,  as  pro- 
pounded by  Prof.  Harris.  His  avowed  object  would  be  by  the 
use  of  example  and  logical  division  to  lead  them  to  define  what 
they  evidently  understood  so  thoroughly  and  were  talking  of  so 
glibly.  “ It  is  not  that.  What  then  is  it?  I am  not  to  be  satis- 
fied with  a statement  about  the  thing ; I must  know  what  the 
to  ’6 v,  the  very  thing,  is.”  In  order  to  find  this  he  would  now 
approach  the  subject  from  a different  point,  and  put  another 
set  of  questions  which  would  be  answered  as  readily  as  the  pre- 
vious ones.  Not  till  he  had  proceeded  a certain  length  in  this 
his  skilled  dialectical  process  would  he  bring  out  his  terrible 
elenchos  or  principle  of  contradiction  got  from  Zeno,  and  crush 
as  in  a vise  the  double  set  of  answers,  showing  that  they  con- 
tradicted each  other — this  amid  the  visible  mortification  of  some 
and  the  gratified  tittering  of  others.  Having  thus  fulfilled  one 
of  the  ends  of  his  life  in  exposing  the  show  of  pretended  wisdom, 
we  can  conceive  him  setting  off  to  Boston  to  wait  the  opening 
of  Harvard  College,  there  to  have  the  opportunity  to  play  the 


56 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


fire  of  his  dialectics  on  students  and  even  professors,  and  ques- 
tion them  as  to  the  consistency  of  their  philosophy  and  the 
worth  of  their  boasted  science.  Quite  as  likely  when  half  way 
he  would  have  stopped  and  stood  still  for  hours,  being  arrested 
by  his  daimonion,  and  then  returned  to  Concord  to  have  another 
gymnastic  contest,  ending  in  the  dissipation  of  error,  if  not  in 
the  establishment  of  truth. 

If  Socrates  was  the  wisest  man  in  old  Athens — so  declared 
by  the  oracle — Bacon  may  be  regarded  as  about  the  wisest 
guide  in  modern  times.  I cannot  find  that  the  philosophers  of 
Concord  are  following  the  method,  or  that  they  have  drunk  into 
the  spirit,  of  the  father  of  induction.  They  feel  the  slow  method 
of  observation  to  be  tedious  and  irksome  to  their  ardent  nature. 
They  seize  and  cling  to  what  recommends  itself  at  once  to  their 
higher  nature,  intellectual  and  moral,  and  would  mount  to  the 
supreme  truth  at  once.  They  are  unwilling  to  start  with  what 
Bacon  insists  we  should  begin  with  in  all  research,  “ the  neces- 
sary rejections  and  exclusions,”  with  what  Whewell  recommends 
as  “The  Decomposition  of  Facts;”  that  is,  to  fix  on  the  precise 
thing  to  be  examined,  and  put  the  irrelevant  matter  out  of  the 
way.  The  whole  school  are  apt  to  mix  up  things  which  should 
be  carefully  separated,  and  to  affirm  of  the  whole  what  is  true 
only  of  a part.  They  are  especially  averse  to  the  slow  and  labori- 
ous method  recommended  by  Bacon  of  collecting  facts  external 
and  internal  (for  there  aro  internal  facts  as  well  as  external),  of 
collating  and  co-ordinating  them,  and  thus  rising,  not  per  saltunt 
but  gradatim , from  particulars  to  lower  laws  or  axioms  (as 
Bacon  calls  them),  thence  to  middle,  and  only  then  to  the 
highest  of  all,  and  to  causes  and  forms. 

I hold  that  the  grand  ideas  which  they  fondle  and  cherish 
and  hold  forth  to  the  view  of  the  world  are  all  genuine ; that 
they  are  all  in  the  mind  of  man,  and  are  ever  coming  forth  into 
actual  exercise  in  our  inward  experience.  The  business  of  the 
true  philosopher  should  be  to  examine  them  carefully,  to  deter- 
mine their  exact  nature  and  objective  validity.  They  are  en- 
titled to  use  them  only  so  far  as  they  have  done  so.  But  by 
assuming  them  at  once,  and  applying  them  without  induction 
and  without  analysis  or  criticism,  they  mingle  error  with  the  truth, 
and  often  make  the  truth  bear  up  the  error.  They  are  ever 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


57 


forming  rapid  generalizations  upon  loose  resemblances,  which 
cannot  be  carried  out  legitimately ; and  in  applying  them  they 
are  ever  falling  into  serious  mistakes.  Hence  the  common 
objection  taken  to  them  that  they  are  mystical,  which  may  be 
described  as  seeing  everything  in  a mist.  By  gazing  intently 
upon  certain  truths  they  have  cast  a halo  around  them,  created 
by  the  eye  that  looks  to  them.  Those  who  are  religiously  in- 
clined among  them  claim  to  discover  truth  by  divination,  and 
often  mistake  their  own  fancies  for  the  inspiration  of  heaven. 

I regret  much  that  I have  not  been  able  to  obtain  a full 
report  of  the  proceedings  of  the  Concord  meeting.  I applied 
to  the  Boston  Traveller , which  gave  an  account  of  the  proceed- 
ings from  day  to  day,  but  there  were  gaps  in  the  numbers  sent 
me,  and  I cannot  give  and  do  not  pretend  to  give  an  epitome 
of  the  papers  read.1  I must  satisfy  myself  with  bringing  out  the 
characteristics  of  the  school. 

I may  begin  with  Dr.  Jones.  He  is  a genuine  and  represen- 
tative member  of  the  school.  I have  taken  a fancy  for  him : he 
has  so  much  personality,  he  is  so  unlike  his  age,  so  unlike  his 
country.  He  is  a native  of  Virginia,  but  is  now  settled  in  Illi- 
nois. Here  he  established  some  twenty  years  ago  the  “ Plato 
Club  of  Jacksonville.”  It  opened  with  him  and  two  or  three 
ladies  to  whom  he  read  a dialogue  of  Plato.  “ It  has  had,”  says 
a writer  in  The  Platonist,  “ vicissitudes  of  interruption  and 
resurrection.  Meeting  originally  at  various  residences,  it  at 
length  found  a permanent  home  in  the  parlors  of  Mrs.  J.  O. 
King,  who  has  been  a member  from  the  first.  A few  years  ago 
the  meetings  were  transferred  to  the  rooms  of  the  sister  of  Mrs. 
King,  Mrs.  Eliza  Wolcott,  who  is  also  one  of  the  original  mem- 
bers. Of  this  society  Dr.  Jones  is  the  permanent  lecturer.  It 
meets  every  Saturday  at  io  A.M.  The  reader  reads  Plato  ordi- 
narily in  the  Bohn  translation,  the  Greek  original  being  at  hand, 

1 When  this  article  was  nearly  completed  (Dec.  io)  I received  The  Journal  of 
Speculative  Philosophy  for  July,  the  publication  of  which  has  been  evidently 
delayed.  It  contains  articles  read  at  Concord  from  Aug.  2 to  5,  viz.:  The  Kant 
Centennial,  by  Prof.  Mears;  Kant  and  Hegel,  by  Dr.  Harris;  Kant’s  Transcen- 
dental Deduction  of  Categories,  by  Prof.  Morris;  The  Results  of  the  Kantian 
Philosophy,  by  Julia  Ward  Howe  ; also  a brief  Report  of  Discussions  at  Concord, 
by  Mr.  Sanborn. 


53 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


and  he  commonly  comments  upon  it  at  length.”  The  writings 
of  the  great  masters  of  literature  and  the  sacred  books  of  the 
world  are  frequently  adduced  in  corroboration  and  explanation 
of  statements  made.  In  this  way  are  frequently  used  the  Bible, 
Homer,  the  Greek  tragedians,  the  Hindu  dramas  and  sacred 
texts,  Shakespeare,  Dante,  and  Goethe.  Some  of  us  are 
grateful  that  we  have  one  Bible  ; but  this  club  has  a number 
of  Bibles, — from  some  of  which  it  might  be  as  difficult 
to  get  light  as  to  extract  sunbeams  from  cucumbers.  It  be- 
lieves in  the  Bible  of  the  Hebrew  and  Greek  Testaments, — 
always  as  interpreted  in  accordance  with  Plato ; but  it  also  be- 
lieves in  others.  “ All  Bibles,”  says  Mr.  Block  in  an  article  in 
The  Platonist , “ are  myths — narratives  so  constructed  as  to  re- 
veal to  the  fit  interpreter  the  Absolute  Truth.”  If  this  means  all 
truth  or  truth  without  error,  I fear  the  fit  interpreter  has  not  yet 
appeared.  The  club  has  been  honored  by  a number  of  eminent 
visitors,  such  as  A.  Bronson  Alcott,  Harris,  Emerson,  Snider. 
Should  I ever  be  in  the  region,  I hope  they  will  allow  me  the 
privilege  of  attending  one  of  their  meetings.  Their  creed  seems 
to  be  : “There  is  one  God,  and  Plato  is  his  prophet” — a higher 
prophet  I acknowledge  than  Mohammed,  or  even  than  Hegel, 
whom  the  Germans  so  admired  an  age  ago ; but,  alas ! they  are 
now  inclined  to  tear  down  their  idol.  As  Plato  was  a prophet, 
we  can  conceive  him  to  have  had  a glimpse  of  this  Jacksonville 
club  rising  up  in  Illinois  twenty-one  hundred  years  after,  and  I 
am  sure  the  thought  brought  a gratified  smile  upon  his  face  and 
helped  to  bear  him  under  those  doubts  and  snarls  that  sate  on 
the  countenance  of  his  critical  pupil  Aristotle  as  he  listened  to 
his  master. 

Dr.  Jones  delivered  two  courses  of  lectures  at  Concord  : one 
on  “ Law  in  Relation  to  Modern  Civilization,”  the  second  on 
“ Platonism.”  He  revels  in  the  grand  ideas  of  Plato.  He 
quotes  numerous  passages  which  set  forth  the  grandeur  of  the 
soul,  its  pre-existence  and  its  immortality.  Applying  his  lofty 
views  to  the  present  day,  he  shows  what  is  the  downward  tend- 
ency of  “ the  cognition  of  a physics  without  a metaphysics  ; a 
natural  without  a supernatural ; a material  without  a spiritual ; 
a real  without  an  ideal  world ; a lower  world  without  an  upper 
world,  and  consequently  a natural  order  without  an  intelligible 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY.  59 

order;  natural  law  without  mind,  natural  forces  without  will 
forces,  and  in  fine  a Cosmos  without  a Logos.” 

I regard  it  as  quite  in  order  to  refer  to  the  Platonist,  a 
periodical  published  monthly  at  St.  Louis  and  edited  by  Thomas 
M.  Johnson,  who  seems  to  be  a scholarly  man.  It  is  devoted 
chiefly  to  “ the  dissemination  of  the  Platonic  philosophy  in  all  its 
phases.”  So  far  as  I have  seen  it,  it  gazes  most  fondly  on  one 
phase ; this,  I may  add,  the  highest.  Plato  was  a many-sided 
man.  In  particular  he  had  both  a negative  and  a positive  side, 
a searching,  doubting  side  and  a doctrinal,  dogmatic  side.  He 
does  seek  to  establish  truth,  but  like  his  master  Socrates  he  is 
quite  as  frequently  employed  in  exposing  pretension.  In  many 
of  his  dialogues  he  seems  to  be  satisfied  with  sifting  the  theo- 
ries advanced  in  his  time  as  to  truth,  beauty,  virtue,  and  kindred 
topics,  is  at  no  pains  to  specify  what  is  the  truth,  and  leaves 
us  in  doubt  whether  it  can  be  found.  This  side  of  Plato  was 
accepted  by  the  academic  schools — older,  middle,  and  new — 
and  in  the  end  ran  itself  out  in  the  barest  scepticism,  which  dis- 
cussed everything  but  settled  nothing.  But  Plato  had  another 
and  more  attractive  side.  He  rose  up  as  on  eagles’,  nay,  rather  on 
angels’  wings  towards  the  contemplation  of  the  eternal  Idea  in 
its  relations  to  God,  the  soul,  and  the  world.  This  side  culmi- 
nated in  the  Neoplatonism  of  Alexandria,  which  represented 
the  highest  state  of  the  soul  as  consisting  in  ecstasy ; that  is, 
the  soul  gazing  forever  on  the  One,  the  True,  the  Good — which 
became  in  the  end  a blank  enough  and  profitless  exercise.  This 
is  the  side  commonly  presented  to  us  in  the  Platonist.  The 
periodical  gives  us  the  treatises  of  Porphyry,  Iamblichus,  Plo- 
tinus, and  Proclus  in  the  version  of  Thomas  Taylor,  of  whom 
it  has-  always  been  doubted  whether  he  understood  the  works 
he  translated. 

Dr.  Mulford  is  held  in  high  esteem  in  the  association  and 
beyond  it.  He  is  the  author  of  “The  Nation:  the  Foundations 
of  Civil  Order  and  Political  Life  in  the  United  States.”  He 
there  rests  the  state  on  God  as  the  foundation,  and  binds  the 
superstructure  by  morality.  He  has  another  work,  “ The  Re- 
public of  God,”  which  has  reached  a fourth  edition.  In  it  he 
discusses  high  philosophico-theological  themes  in  a lofty  tone 
of  thought  and  language.  He  has  a higher  estimate  than  I 


6o 


THE  PRINCE  TON  RE  VIE  IV. 


have  of  Hegel  and  his  artificial  forms,  and  of  Maurice,  whose 
mists,  which  so  impressed  many  an  age  ago,  are  now  melting 
away.  He  does  treat  of  sin  at  considerable  length,  but  his  view 
of  it  and  of  its  essential  evil  is  not  sufficiently  deep.  “ Sin,” 
he  says,  “ is  unreal  ” (p.  140) ; “ it  is  the  contradiction  of  life  ; but 
in  the  consciousness  of  its  contradiction  [Hegelian]  there  is 
the  evidence  of  a deeper  unity  in  which  it  may  be  overcome, 
and  of  the  ground  of  its  obliteration.  There  may  be  a root  of 
righteousness  of  life  that  is  deeper  than  the  root  of  evil.”  Sin 
seems  to  me  to  be  as  real  a thing  as  moral  good,  and  I do  not 
care  about  putting  good  and  evil  into  a unity.  Proceeding  in 
this  line,  Bailey  in  “ Festus”  calls  “good  God’s  right  hand,  and 
evil  his  left.”  In  the  paper  read  at  Concord  he  criticised  the  vari- 
ous schools  of  political  life,  such  as  the  physical,  the  utilitarian, 
the  social,  the  formal  or  abstract.  He  maintains  that  the  state 
implies  continuity,  authority  of  law,  religion,  and  morality. 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Bartol  spoke  of  the  “Transcendent  Faculty 
in  Man.”  He  has  glowing  passages.  He  says  man  is  an  ani- 
mal ; “ but  he  is  an  angel  too : feels  the  wings  folded  up  on 
him,  is  aware  of  his  ability  to  slough  off  his  physical  organism 
as  a serpent  does  his  skin  in  the  wood,  conscious  that  he  can 
dispense  with  many  a tendency  and  proclivity  characteristic  and 
conspicuous  in  his  present  life  and  history,  yet  not  lose  his  iden- 
tity, but  be  the  same  in  essence  when  he  shall  soar  as  now  he 
grovels  or  gropes.”  I doubt  much  whether  he  sees  the  right 
way  in  which  man  may  soar.  “ His  constitution,  as  it  is  at  any 
given  time,  is  all  he  has  to  go  by.  It  and  not  the  new  transla- 
tion, the  Bible  revised  or  unrevised,  is  that  real  word  of  God 
which  is  not  a book  but,  as  the  sacred  volume  itself  avers,  a 
hammer  and  a fire  and  runs  very  swiftly.  Can  a book  run  or 
be  a hammer  or  fire?  The  word  of  God  came  to  Isaiah  or  to 
Micah  : did  it  not  to  Garrison  and  Lincoln  and  John  Brown? 
As  says  the  Greek  sage,  ‘ all  flows,’  and  our  nature  blends  in  the 
flux  of  things.  We  have  ecstasies,  exaltations  above  our  ordi- 
nary state  to  appreciate  Paul’s  trances,  or  the  transfiguration 
of  Jesus  with  Peter  and  James  and  John,  or  George  Washing- 
ton’s elevation  once  above  himself,  as  the  historian  relates,  on 
the  battle-field.” 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Kedney  (author  of  a work  on  Aesthetics)  deliv- 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


6 1 


ered  an  able  lecture  on  the  “ Groundwork  of  Ethics.”  He  re- 
viewed the  improved  Benthamism  as  presented  by  John  Stuart 
Mill,  Henry  Sidgwick,  and  Herbert  Spencer,  and  gave  an  expo- 
sition of  the  ethics  of  Kant. 

Professor  Harris  seems  to  me  to  be  at  this  present  time  the 
greatest  man  in  the  school,  and  the  most  likely  to  rule  its  future 
destinies.1  I look  upon  him  with  profound  respect.  It  may 
be  doubted  whether  there  is  or  was  an  abler  superintendent  of 
schools  in  America  than  he  was  when  he  held  that  office  in  Mis- 
souri. I do  hope  that  he  will  continue  to  further  the  cause  of 
education  by  lecturing  to  our  teachers  and  in  colleges  on  what 
is  called  Pedagogic  in  the  German  universities,  or  in  some  other 
way  that  may  occur  to  his  fertile  mind.  But  his  great  work,  as 
it  appears  to  me,  is  The  Journal  of  Speculative  Philosophy , of 
which  he  is  the  learned  editor,  and  which  he  has  carried  on 
with  infinite  courage  and  perseverance  for  a great  many  years 
in  spite  of  indifference  on  the  part  of  the  public,  and  I suspect 
under  a heavy  pecuniary  burden.  In  that  journal  he  has  had 
discussed,  always  from  a certain  standpoint  but  invariably  in  an 
elevated  tone,  the  deepest  problems  of  human — I believe  he 
would  say  divine — thought,  and  tried  to  make  clear  to  the  Amer- 
ican public  the  profundities  of  Hegel.  Once  in  St.  Louis  I had 
the  privilege  of  listening  to  one  of  his  papers  or  lectures  deliv- 
ered in  a parlor  to  a dozen  high-class  ladies,  who  looked  as  if 
they  understood  him,  and  who  certainly  appreciated  him  highly. 
He  made  the  generalizations  of  Hegel  as  clear  and  satisfactory 
as  they  could  possibly  be  made — generalizations  very  far-rang- 
ing, but,  I may  add,  with  which  I could  not  concur.  He  deliv- 
ered at  Concord  two  courses,  five  lectures  in  each  : one  on  “ Phi- 
losophical Distinctions,”  and  the  other  an  exposition  of  Hegel’s 
philosophy.  I do  hope  these  last  lectures  will  be  published  in 
his  journal  or  in  a separate  form,  so  as  to  enable  Americans  to 
determine  whether  Hegel’s  strongly  compacted  system  is  a cas- 
tle on  the  earth  or  a castle  in  the  air ; it  is  visibly  a castle  with 
battlements,  with  bastions  and  towers  of  an  imposing  apd  for- 
midable character.  In  the  course  on  “ Philosophical  Distinc- 

1 If  so,  it  will  have  less  of  Plato  and  more  of  Hegel  : less  of  gold-leaf  and 
more  of  iron  ; less  of  rich  pasture  and  more  of  fences  ; less  of  flower  and  fruit  and 
more  of  stalks  and  branches. 


62 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


tions”he  has  stages  of  cognition  arranged  a la  Hegel  in  a triune 
or  triplet  form.  The  first  stage  is  sense-perception,  in  which 
there  is  no  thinking.  This  gives  us  mechanism.  My  criti- 
cism is  that  there  is  intelligence  in  sense-perception,  and  that 
there  cannot  be  mechanism  without  thinking.  The  second  stage 
is  reflection,  which  classifies  and  arranges.  I remark  that  this 
is  a peculiar  use  of  the  word  reflection,  the  function  of  which  is 
usually  supposed  to  be  the  bending  back  of  the  mind  and  the 
looking  on  what  is  in  the  mind  or  has  been  in  it.  Arranging 
and  classifying  has  been  commonly  ascribed  to  the  compara- 
tive powers  of  the  mind.  This  second  stage  brings  us  to  chem- 
ism,  which,  as  it  appears  to  me,  cannot  fall  under  reflection. 
The  third  stage  is  aetiology  or  teleology,  which  carries  up  to 
another  triad — the  miracle,  art,  and  religion.  These  three  things 
may  have  some  affinity  as  all  coming  from  the  higher  nature  of 
man,  but  their  bond  of  union  is  very  loose.  It  appears  to  me 
that  an  ingenuity  much  inferior  to  that  of  Hegel  or  Prof.  Harris 
could  draw  out  of  the  worlds  of  mind  and  matter  an  indefinite 
number  of  such  trinities,  made  in  a vague  way  to  embrace  all 
things  under  them,  but  the  distinctions  having  no  deep  or  ac- 
tual foundation  either  in  mind  or  matter. 

I am  sorry  that  I have  not  the  means  of  sketching  certain 
other  papers.  As  I am  dealing  with  philosophy  I pass  over  the 
literary  papers,  some  of  which  were  brilliant.  I have  studiously 
omitted  those  of  the  professors  who  came  from  their  academic 
halls  to  discuss  metaphysical  subjects,  as  President  Porter  (who 
had  read  for  him  the  paper  which  appeared  in  the  last  number  of 
this  Review),  Professors  Morris,  Mears,  and  Watson.  They 
appeared  personally  or  by  their  papers  chiefly  to  ventilate  Kant 
in  this  his  centenary  year.  I may  refer  to  them  in  a later  part 
of  this  article,  when  I treat  of  the  great  German  metaphysician. 

It  could  be  shown  by  a large  induction  of  historical  facts 
that  every  prevalent  opinion,  nay,  every  practical  measure  fol- 
lowing, is  apt  to  fall  back  on  a philosophy  to  sustain  and  defend 
it  when  attacked.  Hitherto  the  Concord  school  has  leaned 
mainly  on  the  ideas  of  Plato,  so  grand  but  at  the  same  time  so 
vague  and  unbounded.  The  feeling  now  is  that  they  must 
have  something  more  definite  and  logical.  At  this  present 
time  while  there  are  countless  metaphysicians  of  ability  in  Amer- 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY.  63 

ica,  there  is,  unhappily  or  happily,  no  influential  philosopher 
or  philosophic  school  commanding  the  thought  of  our  young 
men  and  calling  forth  their  devotion.  The  consequence  is  that 
those  who  are  not  content  with  the  commonplaces  of  America 
are  resorting  to  the  imposing  systems  of  Germany,  most  of  them 
to  Kant  and  Neo-Kantism — which  is  the  form  in  which  Kant  is 
now  presented,  and  a few  of  them  to  Hegel. 

In  the  last  century  Locke  was  by  far  the  most  influential  phi- 
losopher in  America.  He  was  the  leader  in  the  great  movement 
which  set  aside  the  old  abstract  philosophy  drawn  out  of  the 
brain  in  favor  of  the  new  method  founded  on  facts  and  experi- 
ence, and  so  he  was  hailed  by  a people  who  rebelled  against 
kings  and  established  a republic.  Locke  easily  derived  all  our 
ideas  from  sensation  and  reflection.  Happily  this  philosophy 
was  never  accepted  entirely  in  America.  Men  seeking  to  de- 
fend truth  and  morality  were  always  calling  in,  consciously  or 
unconsciously,  and  appealing  to  something  deeper  than  a gath- 
ered experience  which  can  never  be  necessary  or  universal. 
The  Scottish  principle  of  common-sense  satisfied  many  for  a 
time,  but  is  now  forsaken,  as  supposed  to  be  a mere  appeal  ad 
populmn  and  not  sufficiently  profound.  American  youths,  after 
finishing  a rather  commonplace  course  of  mental  philosophy  in 
their  colleges  at  home,  now  betake  themselves  to  Deutschland, 
with  high  expectations  of  being  able  to  reach  the  bottom  of 
things.  A writer  in  a foolish  paper  lately  published,  apparently 
on  the  principle  “Answer  a fool  according  to  his  folly  lest  he  be 
wise  in  his  own  conceit,”  thus  describes  them  (“Conflicts  of  the 
Age,”  p.  72) : “ I have  observed  of  those  youths  who,  after  finish- 
ing their  course  in  the  college  down  there,  set  off  for  a year  or 
two  to  Germany,  that  they  come  back  with  a most  formidable 
nomenclature  as  ponderous  as  the  armor  of  Goliath  of  Gath. 
How  I rejoice  to  find  a boy  rising  up  to  lay  them  prostrate  with 
a more  primitive  weapon!  For  they  have  become  unbearably 
haughty,  and  would  slay  all  who  cannot  pronounce  their  shib- 
boleth at  the  fords  of  speculation.  They  are  introduced  at  the 
German  universities  to  a set  of  distinctions  which  seem  very 
deep, — the  distinction  between  form  and  matter,  subject  and  ob- 
ject, a priori  and  a posteriori,  phenomenon  and  noumenon, — by 
which  they  are  led  into  a labyrinth  with  no  clue  to  bring  them 


64 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


out.  In  all  these  distinctions,  and  in  the  nomenclature  express- 
ing them,  there  are  subtle  errors  lurking  which  lead  through 
idealism  to  scepticism.”  These  youths,  not  willing  to  lose  the 
wares  they  have  gained  with  such  labor  and  at  such  expense, 
bring  them  home  with  them,  and  use  them  without  being  able 
to  sift  them  or  cast  out  the  adulterations,  and  they  dispose  of 
them  to  half-admiring,  half-doubting  pupils. 

Kant  has  reached,  as  it  appears  to  me,  his  highest  altitude 
in  this  his  centenary  year, — few  philosophers  have  lived  so  long. 
In  Germany  the  works  upon  him,  volumes,  articles,  pamphlets 
published  this  year,  are  uncountable,  all  acknowledging  defects 
in  Kant  as  understood  an  age  or  two  ago,  but  expounding,  or 
more  frequently  hinting  at,  a Neo-Kantism  which  is  to  avoid 
the  obvious  errors  of  the  old.  I have  at  this  moment  on  the 
table,  before  me  four  goodly  volumes  on  Kant  written  in  the 
English  tongue  within  the  last  few  years  : There  is  the  elabo- 
rate volume  on  “ Kant,”  written  by  Professor  Edward  Caird,  of 
Glasgow,  who  examines  Kant  on  the  principles  of  Hegel,  and 
reaches  a more  ideal  realism,  which  no  doubt  is  self-contradic- 
tory,— but  then  all  truth  is  the  combination  of  contradictories. 
There  is.  a smaller  volume  “On  the  Philosophy  of  Kant,”  by 
Robert  Adamson,  of  Owens  College,  Manchester,  who  discusses 
the  problems  started  by  Kant,  acknowledging  that  Kant’s 
“system  has  manifested  inner  want  of  consistency  and  evident 
incompleteness  but  so  far  as  I can  see,  not  putting  in  its  room 
anything  satisfactory.  He  says:  “ It  can  hardly  be  too  strongly 
impressed  on  the  student  of  philosophy  that  the  ordinary  mode 
of  starting  in  constructive  metaphysic  with  the  Cartesian  cer- 
tainty of  one’s  own  existence  is  misleading,  and  likely  to  entail 
the  gravest  error.”  I have  not  been  able  to  find  what  he  pro- 
poses to  start  with.  There  is  the  work  of  Professor  Watson,  of 
Queen’s  University,  Kingston,  Canada,  “ Kant  and  his  English 
Critics,”  in  which  he  acutely  criticises  Balfour,  Stirling,  Lewes, 
and  others  who  are  charged  with  not  properly  interpreting 
Kant.  He  meets  these  men  by  showing  that  Kant  when  prop- 
erly understood  is  not  responsible  for  their  opinions.  In  my 
opinion,  they  may  be  more  successfully  met  by  showing  that 
Kant  is  himself  wrong  in  those  points  in  which  they  father  their 
errors  on  him.  Professor  Watson  is  constantly  hinting  that  he 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


65 


could  improve  Kant  on  certain  points.  Of  course  I have  no 
opinion  as  to  these  improvements  till  they  are  drawn  out.  I 
have  also  before  me  “Text-Book  to  Kant:”  Translation,  Repro- 
duction, Commentary,  Index,  with  Biographical  Sketch,  by  James 
Hutchison  Stirling ; 550  pages.  Written  in  his  usual  Carlylish 
style,  often  exaggerated  to  crankiness,  he  has  some  admirable 
expositions  and  valuable  criticisms  of  Kant’s  Critique.  Once 
more,  I see  an  advertisement  of  a translation  of  the  Critique  by 
Max  Muller. 

I believe  that  we  have  now  reached  the  watershed,  and  that 
henceforth  the  stream  will  descend.  Every  one  of  these  authors 
so  far  finds  fault  with  Kant.  From  this  date  he  will  be  criticised 
more  and  more  severely.  More  fundamental  objections  will  be 
taken  to  him  than  is  done  by  these  his  admirers.  All  philoso- 
phers now  see  that  such  ideas,  or  rather  convictions,  as  identity, 
infinity,  and  moral  good  cannot  be  derived,  as  Locke  maintained, 
from  sensation  or  the  reflection  of  sensation  in  the  mind.  So, 
with  the  ghost  of  agnosticism  grinning  at  us  in  the  darkness, 
we  shall  now  have  to  inquire  whether,  on  Kant’s  theory  that 
the  mind  begins  with  phenomena  in  the  sense  of  appearances 
(. Erscheinungen ),  it  can  ever  rise  to  realities. 

I have  as  great  an  admiration  of  Kant,  of  the  man  and  of  his 
philosophy,  as  those  I have  been  criticising  have.  Vast  good  has 
resulted  from  his  calling  in  mental  principles  which  guarantee 
higher  truth  than  the  senses  and  save  us  from  scepticism.  I 
like  much  his  partiality  for  the  old  logic,  and  I approve  of  some 
of  his  improvements  of  it,  as,  for  instance,  in  introducing  Im- 
mediate Inferences.  For  what  is  valuable  in  his  categories  he 
is  very  much  indebted  to  that  old  logic.  He  has  done  invalu- 
able service  to  morals,  and  I may  add  religion,  in  upholding  the 
practical  reason  with  its  categorical  imperative.  The  study  of 
his  philosophy  calls  forth  and  braces  the  highest  energies  of  the 
mind,  and  makes  us  feel  that  truth  and  virtue  have  an  immov- 
able foundation. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  he  has  fallen  into  errors  which,  legiti- 
mately or  illegitimately,  have  been  used  to  support  and  justify 
very  pernicious  ends.  I do  not  allow  that  Kant  met  the  scep- 
ticism, or  rather  the  agnosticism,  of  Hume  in  a wise  or  satisfac- 
tory manner.  Hume  made  the  mind  to  start  with,  and  in  the 
5 


66 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


end  to  be  in  possession  of,  only  impressions  and  ideas.  His 
opponents  should  meet  him  here  and  drive  back  the  ravager  at 
the  entrance.  But  Kant  took  down  his  outer  wall  and  allowed 
the  Trojan  horse  to  enter  with  an  armed  force  which  he  could 
not  cast  out,  and  which  kindled  a conflagration  which  left  noth- 
ing but  ashes  and  mounds  behind. 

i take  deeper  objection  to  Kant’s  philosophy  than  was  done 
by  President  Porter  or  Professor  Morris  at  the  Concord  meet- 
ing. First,  I object  entirely  to  his  phenomenal  theory  of  knowl- 
edge, to  what  is  called  phenomenology.  Professor  Mears  says 
in  his  paper  of  “ the  materials  presented  to  us  by  the  inner  and 
outer  sense:”  “These  materials  are  not  objects,  and  their  pres- 
ence does  not  constitute  them  experience  until  they  have  passed 
through  the  pre-existing  moulds  of  the  mind  and  taken  their 
shape.  They  are  not  in  space  or  in  time  of  themselves ; they 
are  neither  one,  nor  many,  nor  all ; they  are  neither  like  nor 
unlike  [is  one  rose  not  like  another?];  they  are  neither  sub- 
stance nor  qualities,  neither  cause  nor  effect ; they  have  in  fact 
no  being  except  as  the  mind  by  its  own  insight  recognizes  or 
affirms  it  of  them.”  The  professor  is  forever  lauding  Kant  for 
undermining  sensationalism  ; but  he  did  so  by  making  mind  as 
well  as  matter  unknown,  and  thereby,  without  meaning  it,  land- 
ing us  logically  in  agnosticism,  in  the  darkness  of  which  Huxley 
builds  up  materialism.  I could  show  that  agnosticism  claiming 
to  be  logically  derived  from  Kant  is  lowering  thought  in  this 
the  last  quarter  of  the  nineteenth  century  quite  as  much  as 
sensationalism  professing  to  come  logically  from  Locke  did  in 
the  corresponding  quarter  of  the  eighteenth  century.  As  Ameri- 
cans began  then  to  search  Locke,  so  they  must  now  commence 
to  search  Kant, — always  after  studying  him  and  taking  what  is 
good  from  him.  Dr.  Stirling  thus  expounds:  “In  short,  both 
outer  object  and  inner  subject,  being  perceived  only  through 
sense,  are,  by  necessary  consequence,  perceived  not  as  they  are 
in  themselves,  or  not  as  they  just  are , but  merely  as  they  ap- 
pear. Whether  we  look  to  space  or  time,  it  is  only  our  own 
states  we  know  in  either,” — and  I may  add,  our  own  states  merely 
as  appearances.  I hold  that  the  mind  begins  with  things  and 
not  with  phenomena,  with  things  appearing  and  not  mere  ap- 
pearances. Even  a tree  seen  in  the  water  with  its  head  down 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


67 


is  a real  thing : it  is  the  reflection  of  light  from  the  water.  But 
it  will  be  asked  me  contemptuously,  “ Can  it  be  possible  that 
you  hold  the  vulgar  doctrine  that  you  perceive  the  very  thing?” 
They  will  condescend  to  remind  me  that  to  the  eye  the  sky 
seems  a concave,  whereas  it  is  an  expanse ; that  color  seems  to 
be  in  the  rose,  whereas  science  tells  us  that  it  is  a vibration  at  a 
certain  rate  in  an  ether ; that  we  seem  naturally  to  see  things  at 
a distance,  whereas  we  perceive  only  things  touching  our  eyes. 
Having  condescended  thus,  they  will  then  turn  away  from  me 
as  not  worthy  of  being  further  reasoned  with.  Now  I am  quite 
disposed  to  meet  them  if  they  will  meet  me  in  argument.  By 
the  help  of  a few  acknowledged  distinctions  I am  able  to  hold 
by  the  trustworthiness  of  the  senses.  The  senses  may  be  charged 
with  giving  us  more  than  realities,  may  seem  to  be  giving  us  the 
distance  of  objects,  whereas  experiments  wrought  on  persons 
born  blind  show  that  originally  man  has  no  such  endowment. 
The  difficulty  is  removed  by  drawing  the  distinction  between 
our  original  and  acquired  perceptions,  and  showing  that  our 
original  perceptions,  which  by  the  eye  is  simply  a colored  sur- 
face, do  not  deceive  but  show  us  the  very  thing.  If  those  who 
disagree  with  me  refuse  contemptuously  to  argue  with  me,  I 
can  take  it  patiently,  being  sure  that  some  other  will  be  raised 
up  to  do  what  I have  not  been  able  to  do.  Of  this  I am  cer- 
tain, that  the  phenomenal  theory  of  knowledge  cannot  stand 
much  longer ; if  we  do  not  begin  with  knowledge  in  the  senses, 
inner  and  outer,  we  can  never  get  it  by  a further  process.  Bacon 
in  a well-known  passage  speaks  of  men  being  first  inclined  to 
believe  in  God,  afterwards  having  doubts  as  they  see  difficulties, 
but  in  the  end  reaching  a well-grounded  faith.  There  is  apt 
to  be  a like  process  in  the  theory  of  the  senses.  Men  are  led 
primarily  to  believe  their  senses,  then  they  discover  that  the 
senses  seem  at  times  to  deceive,  but  at  last  they  are  brought  to 
acknowledge  that  the  deceptions  are  apparent,  not  real. 

Secondly,  Kant  has  given  a very  erroneous  account  of  .those 
principles  of  the  mind  which  he  calls  in  to  beat  back  Hume’s 
scepticism.  He  represents  them  as  forms  imposing  themselves 
on  phenomena,  whereas  they  are  not  moulds  superimposing 
qualities,  but  perceptions  of  things'  with  their  qualities.  They 
do  not  impose  space  and  time  upon  objects,  but  perceive 


68 


THE  PRINCETOH  REVIEW. 


objects  as  in  space  and  time.  The  very  favorite  phrases  of 
Kant,  a priori  and  a posteriori , may  cover  error.  There  is  not  an 
a priori  form  to  impose  on  things;  there  is  merely  the  a priori 
capacity  to  discover  things  and  what  is  involved  in  them. 

Thirdly,  Kant  pursued  a wrong  method  throughout — the 
Critical.  I admit  that  what  he  calls  a priori  principles  are  to  be 
sifted  before  they  are  accepted.  But  they  are  to  be  sifted 
simply  by  inquiring  what  they  are  and  what  they  reveal.  This 
does  not  make  a limited  experience  the  foundation  of  truth. 
Any  one  who  will  give  his  attention  can  understand  that  there 
may  be  truths  prior  to  induction  and  above  induction,  but  the 
nature  of  which  we  can  discover  only  by  induction. 

But  what  are  we  to  make  of  Hegel?  I believe  I had  better 
let  that  question  be  answered  by  Prof.  Harris.  Some  of  my 
readers,  however,  may  be  interested  to  learn  what  pains  I have 
taken  to  be  able  to  find  an  answer  for  myself.  A quarter  of  a 
century  ago  I resolved  to  spend  five  months  of  the  vacation 
allowed  me  in  Queen’s  College,  Belfast,  in  mastering  the  sys- 
tem of  the  mighty  man  who  for  a time  reigned  as  king  of 
thought  in  Germany.  I got  a good  edition  of  his  works  and 
set  myself  earnestly  to  the  task  of  understanding  the  profound 
thinker.  To  assist  me  I read  at  the  same  time  Vol.  IV.  of 
Willm’s  “ Histoire  de  la  Philosophic  Allemande,”  which  ex- 
pounds the  system  with  all  the  French  clartd.  I was  soon  made 
to  realize  that  I was  travelling  with  a giant  who  walked  with 
seven-leagued  boots,  and  that  I had  great  difficulty  in  keeping 
up  with  him ; but  this  arose  simply  from  his  strength  and  my 
weakness,  and  not  from  any  defect  of  his.  So  I persevered. 
I felt  at  times  as  if  I got  glimpses  of  his  meaning,  and  then  I 
seemed  to  lose  them.  I was  sure  that  this  stream  must  be  very 
deep,  and  I was  bent  on  sounding  it.  But  then  it  was  pressed 
upon  me  that  it  might  look  so  very  deep  because  it  is  so  drumly. 
Still  I held  on  with  all  the  obstinacy  of  a Scotchman  for  weary 
months  in  the  sweet  summer  days.  After  months  of  study  I 
thought  it  right  to  take  a survey  and  an  estimate  of  what  I had 
gained.  As  I drew  in  the  net  I felt  that  I had  an  immense, 
seemingly  an  immeasurable  length  of  knotted  cordage,  but  the 
living  fish  were  very  few.  At  length,  feeling  my  brain  oppressed, 
I broke  off  and  betook  myself  to  the  Grampian  Mountains, 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


69 


where  I found  the  observation  of  the  forms  of  nature,  especially 
of  the  mountain  plants,  to  be  far  more  pleasant,  and  I thought 
profitable,  than  the  study  of  the  artificial  forms  of  Hegel’s  dia- 
lectic. In  the  end  I came  to  the  conclusion  that  I had  gone 
far  enough  into  the  labyrinth,  and  that  as  life  is  so  brief  and 
uncertain,  and  as  I had  so  much  other  study  to  carry  on  and 
work  to  do,  it  might  be  as  well  to  stop. 

Since  that  I have  once  or  twice  ventured  to  criticise  Hegel, 
but  was  told  very  emphatically  by  those  who  appeared  to  un- 
derstand him  that  I did  not  understand  him,  and  I was  not  quite 
sure  whether  they  might  not  be  right.  I have  watched  with 
deep  interest  the  history  of  the  system,  and  conversed  with 
several  eminent  Hegelians  both  of  the  right  and  left  for  hours 
at  a time,  and  found  no  two  of  them  agreeing  with  each  other. 
I have  observed  that  when  any  man  opposes  the  system,  he  is 
told  that  he  does  not  understand  it.  I was  amused  at,  and 
rather  gratified  with,  the  story  told  that  Hegel  had  said,  “Only 
one  man  understands  me,  and  he  does  not  understand  me.”  I 
was  not  amazed,  nor  was  I sorrowful,  to  hear  that  the  believers 
in  Hegel  were  every  year  becoming  fewer  and  fewer,  tho 
metaphysicians  still  continued  to  study  him  and  admire  his  dia- 
lectical skill.  I confess,  however,  that  I was  taken  by  surprise 
when  the  pessimists,  who  follow  much  the  same  method  but 
reach  far  different  results,  described  one  so  famous  as  a charla- 
tan. Finding  that  in  the  histories  of  philosophy  he  had  a great 
name  in  the  statement  and  interpretation  of  opinions,  I betook 
myself  to  him  at  times  when  I was  studying  some  of  the  an- 
cient systems,  such  as  that  of  Aristotle  ; but  I found  that  he 
put  them  all  under  his  own  forms — in  short,  Hegelized  them.1 
Of  Christianity  he  always  wrote  in  the  way  of  compliment,  but 
it  is  when  he  has  made  it  speak  as  he  speaks. 

It  is  not  easy  to  criticise  Hegelianism,  for  this  among  other 
reasons,  that  it  contains  so  much,  all  things  divine  and  human, 

1 Many  of  the  German  histories  of  philosophy  and  those  who  copy' them  in 
England  and  America  fall  into  a like  fault.  Thus  they  represent  the  Greek  phi- 
losophers as  seeking  after  the  absolute,  which  is  a German  thought.  What  the 
Greeks  were  seeking  after  was  to  ov,  the  reality,  the  real  thing  ; not  the  Ding 
an  sick,  which  is  an  absurdity,  as  there  can  be  no  such  thing  as  a thing  in  itself ; 
but  the  thing  itself,  the  very  thing. 


70 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


that  few  if  any  finite  minds  can  comprehend  it.  Those  who 
would  chivalrously  enter  into  the  lists  against  him  may  find 
that  they  are  fighting  with  forms  and  not  realities — with  wind- 
mills, like  Don  Quixote.  His  philosophy  seems  to  me  to  con- 
sist of  rapid  generalizations  drawn  by  the  speculative  intellect 
from  a few  loose  but  at  times  true  points  of  resemblance,  over- 
looking specialties  and  differences.  Such  are  his  perpetual  trin- 
ities, being,  essence,  notion:  under  being,  quality,  quantity, 
measure  ; under  essence,  ground  of  existence,  phenomenon,  re- 
ality; under  notion,  subjective  notion,  object,  idea;  and  these 
again  subdivided  into  threes,  the  whole  in  the  end  being  identi- 
fied with  the  Christian  Trinity.  They  remind  me  of  those  sys- 
tems of  physical  science  which  were  taught  in  our  universities 
before  the  days  of  Newton  and  induction,  complete  beyond 
what  any  physical  philosopher  can  teach  in  our  day.  Not  being 
formed  carefully  after  the  nature  of  things,  but  by  pure  think- 
ing, these  grand  logical  laws  could  not  be  legitimately  carried 
out,  and  when  they  were  carried  out  came  into  collision  with 
facts  in  our  nature  or  beyond  it.  But  Hegel  with  his  powerful 
intellect  was  determined  to  carry  them  out,  and  in  doing  so  was 
alarmed  by  no  consequences.  When  nature  goes  against  reason, 
he  holds  that  it  must  give  way  before  reason,  the  higher.  When 
he  found  that  Newton’s  discoveries  would  not  fall  into  his  frame- 
work, he  did  not  hesitate  to  set  them  aside,  a circumstance  which 
first  led  scientists  to  doubt  of  his  pretensions.  He  is  ever  as- 
suming what  he  should  first  have  proved,  and  he  does  not  scru- 
ple to  set  aside  self-evident  truth  when  it  crosses  his  path.  He 
admits  that  some  of  his  positions  are  contradictory  of  each 
other,  but  then  he  maintains  that  truth  is  made  up  of  two  sides 
which  are  contradictory.  It  can  be  shown  that  these  antino- 
mies, and  those  of  Kant  as  well,  are  not  contradictions  in  things, 
but  simply  one-sided,  partial,  and  perverted  accounts  of  things. 

He  was  not  contented  to  be  the  minister , he  was  the  magis- 
ter  natnree.  He  ever  lauded  religion,  but  it  had  to  submit  to  be 
ruled  by  his  laws.  It  is  well  known  that  he  did  not  go  regularly 
to  any  church,  and  when  his  wife,  a pious  woman,  would  invite 
him  to  go  with  her,  he  would  reply,  “ Mein  Herz,  thinking 
is  also  devotion.”  I apprehend  that  these  two  things,  first  his 
thinking  not  founded  on  facts  and  not  subject  to  God,  and  sec- 


THE  CONCORD  SCHOOL  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 


71 


ondly  his  ambitious  speculative  intellect,  were  the  two  sides  or 
personalities  that  met  in  the  third  thing  his  philosophy,  the 
whole  constituting  a trinity  which  he  devoutly  worshipped,  and 
in  the  light  of  which  is  revealed  more  of  the  “ Secret  of  Hegel  ” 
than  even  in  Dr.  Stirling’s  elaborate  work. 

It  is  a curious  but  not  an  inexplicable  circumstance  that 
while  his  sun  has  been  going  down  in  Germany,  it  has  been  ris- 
ing in  some  other  countries.  In  Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  and 
I may  add  in  America,  there  has  been  no  influential  thinker 
since  the  decease  of  Mill  and  Hamilton, — always  excepting  Her- 
bert Spencer,  to  whom  many  of  our  higher  minds  are  not  willing 
to  submit  because  of  the  agnosticism  of  his  “First  Principles” 
and  his  identifying  mind  with  nerves.  Finding  nothing  at  home 
to  satisfy  them,  a number  of  youths  in  these  countries  have  been 
resorting  to  Germany.  In  particular  Merton  Hall  in  Oxford 
has  been  a nursery  of  Hegelianism,  which  has  had  powerful 
propagators  in  Mr.  Wallace  and  the  two  brothers  Caird,  the 
principal  and  the  professor.  In  America  Hegel  has  had  an  en- 
lightened admirer  in  Dr.  Harris,  and  a powerful  defence  in  a 
group  of  writers  in  The  Journal  of  Speculative  Philosophy. 

To  sum  up,  I believe  in  the  lofty  aims  of  the  school  at  Con- 
cord. I go  with  them  in  their  courageous  opposition  to  scepti- 
cism, agnosticism,  and  materialism.  They  are  doing  good  by 
holding  before  the  age  certain  elevated  ideas  to  lift  up  its  down- 
ward look.  But  they  will  require  carefully  to  determine  what 
these  ideas  are,  and  what  the  laws  by  which  they  are  regulated 
and  limited  ; what  they  can  do  and  what  they  cannot  do.  Many 
dissatisfied  with  the  meagre  philosophy  of  England,  Scotland,  and 
America  at  this  present  time  are  looking  anxiously  towards  Ger- 
many. But  I do  not  believe  they  will  be  able  to  beat  back  the 
tide  by  the  embankments  erected  by  Kant  and  Hegel,  which 
when  they  give  way,  as  they  are  evidently  doing,  will  only  let 
in  the  floods  of  scepticism  with  greater  force.  When  the  an- 
cient Britons  were  wishing  to  drive  out  the  Romans  they  called 
in  the  Anglo-Saxons,  who  became  more  formidable  masters  than 
those  they  drove  out.  So  it  will  be  with  the  Teutonic  invasion 
which  many  are  calling  in : it  may  introduce  a deeper  error  than 
that  which  it  has  been  brought  in  to  expel. 


James  McCosh. 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


i4|  KNOW  not,”  says  Viollet  le  Due,  “whether  poets,  musi- 
1 cians,  and  painters  are  ever  suddenly  inspired  to  write  an 
ode,  to  compose  a sonata,  or  paint  a picture ; I am  inclined  to 
think  not,  because  no  poet,  musician,  or  painter  of  genius  has 
ever  revealed  to  us  any  such  phenomenon  in  his  experience.  The 
sacred  fire  does  not  kindle  itself.  In  order  to  create  a blaze  we 
must  heap  wood  and  live  coals  together,  arrange  the  sticks,  and 
blow  the  smoldering  pile  until  it  breaks  into  a flame.” 

We  have  not  to  inquire  very  deeply  into  the  means  and 
methods  of  art,  whether  they  be  those  of  the  painter,  the 
sculptor,  or  the  architect,  before  reaching  this  conclusion.  We 
find  that  every  great  creation  of  art  is  a growth,  a development, 
a result  of  previously  acquired  facts  grouped  and  fused  under 
some  dominating  impulse  or  idea.  The  poet  browses  up  and 
down  the  present  and  the  past,  stores  his  mind  from  others’ 
harvests,  gleans  again  the  oft-gleaned  fields ; but  when  his  song 
flows  forth,  freighted  with  the  rich  spoils  of  patient  industry,  it 
has  the  spontaneity  of  an  inspiration.  While  viewing  the  noble 
river  we  forget  the  springs  and  rills  that  comprise  its  source. 

The  painter  presents  an  image  that  seems  flashed  upon  the 
canvas  with  the  ease  and  celerity  of  thought,  with  the  vividness 
and  truth  of  nature;  but  behind  all  this  there  is  the  laborious, 
painstaking,  studious  inquiry  into  the  appropriateness  of  every 
detail,  that  the  harmony  and  value  of  the  most  insignificant 
part  may  have  due  reference  to  the  effect  of  the  whole.  Follow- 
ing- the  methods  of  the  architect  we  shall  reach  a like  conclusion 
in  his  case.  When  he  has  an  edifice  to  construct  he  first  collects 
all  the  data,  the  requisites,  comprehending  use,  cost,  and  loca- 
tion, the  nature  of  the  material  to  be  employed — in  short,  every 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


73 


prominent  practical  requirement  the  character  of  the  edifice  de- 
mands. These  he  reduces  to  order  by  distinguishing  the  more 
prominent  wants  from  those  that  are  merely  accessory.  Upon 
this  data,  thus  ordered,  he  erects  his  constructive  forms,  subor- 
dinating everything  architectural  to  the  utilitarian  aspects  of  the 
plan ; and  when  he  has  so  arranged,  adapted,  and  simplified 
these  requirements  as  to  fulfil  every  requisite,  then  he  proceeds 
to  give  to  them  architectural  expression. 

The  art  of  disposing  his  materials  in  a suitable  and  economi- 
cal manner  to  attain  a given  utilitarian  end  is  properly  comprised 
in  the  science  of  engineering;  but  when  above  and  beyond  these 
utilitarian  ends,  yet  in  no  particular  subverting  them,  the  builder 
seeks  some  expression  of  beauty  in  his  construction,  he  then  be- 
comes an  architect. 

Architecture  has  been  defined  as  the  art  of  ornamental  con- 
struction. A building  constructed  without  reference  to  orna- 
mental design  should  not  properly  be  termed  architectural. 
Mechanical  construction,  even  when  applied  to  house-building, 
when  devoid  of  expression  or  ornamentation,  as  a factory,  for 
instance,  is  not  architecture.  Such  a building,  however,  may  be 
made  architectural  by  artistic  treatment. 

The  first  consideration  of  the  architect,  therefore,  is  to  secure 
a proper  arrangement  of  “ the  real  requirements  and  determine 
their  relative  importance,  without  occupying  himself  with  any 
considerations  of  architecture.”  He  adjusts  and  readjusts  the 
parts,  transposes  the  various  divisions,  and  finally  unites  them 
under  some  prominent  necessity.  He  sketches  the  ground-plans 
with  reference  to  their  general  areas,  and  subdivides  these  ac- 
cording to  the  requirements  of  the  proposed  edifice.  He  applies 
himself  again  and  again  to  this  task,  “ changes  from  left  to  right, 
puts  that  in  front  which  was  behind,  and  returns  a hundred 
times  to  the  disposition  of  details  in  his  design.” 

Have  we  not  seen  in  the  analysis  of  every  art  how  from  small 
beginnings  the  idea  shapes  itself ; how  it  grows  by  the  accretion 
of  new  facts,  and  is  pruned  by  the  elimination  of  those  that  are 
unessential  ? Often  there  is  much  groping  under  faint  gledms  of 
light,  when  suddenly  the  architect  “ believes  that  he  has  discovered 
in  his  programme  a principal  idea,  subordinating  every  other 
consideration.  New  light  breaks  in  upon  him  ; instead  of  ex- 


74 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


amining  the  proposition  before  him  in  detail,  to  arrive  at  the 
general  combination  of  the  whole  he  reverses  the  operation,  he 
discovers  that  until  then  he  has  had  but  a glimpse  of  the  true 
requirements  of  the  structure,  and  finds  that  its  various  apart- 
ments and  dependencies  should  be  submitted  to  a new  general 
disposition,  on  a larger  scale,  affecting  all  their  arrangements  and 
communications.”  In  all  this  extraordinary  combination  of 
geometrical  figures — squares,  rectangles,  parallelograms,  circles 
or  their  segments,  and  what  not — there  has  been  not  the  first 
inkling  of  architectural  ideas.  Both  the  architect  and  the  en- 
gineer are  thus  far  subordinated  to  the  geometrician.  “ If,”  says 
Le  Due,  “ during  these  studies,  the  architect  thinks  about  the 
orders,  the  works  of  the  Greeks,  the  Romans,  or  the  Goths,  or 
anything  foreign  to  the  interior  development  of  his  own  concep- 
tions, he  is  lost,  and  instinctively  sacrifices  some  practical  neces- 
sity of  his  plan  to  obtain  a desirable  architectural  effect.” 

But  his  plan  settled  upon,  “ his  elevations  are  a part  and 
expression  of  them,  he  sees  how  he  should  construct  them,  and 
the  dominating  idea  of  the  plan  becomes  the  principal  feature  of 
the  elevations.” 

But  while  sketching  this  method  of  procedure  I am  not  insen- 
sible of  the  fact  that  there  is  no  arbitrary  rule  of  composition  or 
growth  in  creations  of  art.  Every  artist  forms  his  own  habit,  his 
style,  and  he  carries  his  peculiarities  down  to  the  very  elements 
of  his  art.  Conversing  once  with  a prominent  architect  on  this 
very  subject — with  reference  to  first  conceptions — he  declared 
that  the  elementary  methods  varied  with  the  character  of  the 
artist ; one  may  carefully  determine  the  ground-plans,  and  adapt 
to  them  the  elevations ; while  another,  as  was  not  infrequently 
the  case,  may  conceive  of  the  whole  as  a unit — plans  and  eleva- 
tions fused  under  one  general  and  dominating  idea.  Indeed,  we 
may  draw  an  inference  from  Michael  Angelo’s  looking  upon 
Brunelleschi’s  dome  at  Florence,  and  declaring  that  he  would 
suspend  it  in  the  air  in  his  contemplated  construction  of  that  of 
St.  Peter’s,  at  Rome:  and  I have  no  doubt  that  that  dome  was 
the  first  as  it  was  the  last  inspiration  of  his  vast  undertaking. 

It  is  absurd,  therefore,  to  prescribe  as  arbitrary  the  rules  for 
art,  when  we  find  ample  evidence  of  their  violation  by  the  great- 
est masters — when  we  find  Shakespeare  violating  Aristotle’s 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


75 


fundamental  requisites  for  dramatic  composition,  as  well  as  the 
grammarian’s  most  rigid  rules  of  syntax.  Nevertheless  the  merit 
of  a rule  is  tested  through  its  common  observance,  rather  than 
by  its  occasional  violation,  and  the  practice  of  architects  com- 
monly conforms  to  the  method  of  proceeding  suggested  above : 
on  the  whole,  experience  proves  this  to  be  the  wisest  and  most 
natural  way  of  evolving  from  given  premises  structures  that 
adequately  fulfil  the  ends  for  which  they  are  designed.  Having 
therefore  determined  the  arrangement  of  his  interior  plans,  the 
architect  then  erects  upon  paper  “ a sort  of  skeleton  or  frame,  a 
combination  of  masses,  in  which  he  proceeds  to  make  the  exte- 
rior appearance  a manifestation  of  the  interior  dispositions,  to 
cause  the  idea  of  the  plan  frankly  to  reappear  in  the  elevation, 
and  to  decorate  or  subordinate  the  various  parts  according  to  its 
suggestions.”  Here,  then,  he  enters  upon  the  true  province  of 
the  architect.  Here  his  judgment,  his  taste,  all  the  resources  of 
his  memory,  his  invention,  and  his  artistic  skill,  are  in  demand. 
The  vice-like  tenacity  of  practical  requirements  in  the  elevations 
yields  to  other  influences — allows  of  some  latitude  for  pleasing 
effects.  He  spaces  off  the  main  divisions  of  the  exterior  walls 
by  determining  the  construction  of  the  internal  arrangement. 
He  expresses  frankly  the  divisions  of  stories,  and  the  subdivis- 
ions of  these  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  construc- 
tion. He  pierces  the  walls  with  openings  for  light  and  for 
entrance-ways;  and  when  he  has,  by  many  repeated  experiments, 
brought  his  conception  to  a definite  end,  so  that  his  idea  is 
shaped  and  defined,  and  capable  of  being  formally  expressed,  he 
then  gives  to  his  draughtsmen,  to  be  worked  out  with  more  care, 
the  fragmentary  and  experimental  records  of  his  task. 

The  architect  employs  various  kinds  of  draughtsmen:  to  each 
is  given  the  parts  adapted  to  his  skill.  They  are  required  to  be 
conversant  with  isometric  and  projection  drawing,  and  perspec- 
tive, besides  the  application  of  tints  indicating  the  nature  of  the 
various  materials  employed  in  construction.  The  drawings  of 
architects  comprise  plans,  elevations,  sectional  elevations,  and 
perspective  views — which  latter  profess  to  give  a representation 
of  the  appearance  of  the  building  when  completed.  These  last, 
I may  add,  are  designed  too  often  to  captivate  the  unlearned. 


;6 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


The  critical  generally  mistrust  them,  and  prefer  the  dry  anatomi- 
cal definition  manifested  in  the  plans  and  elevations. 

In  every  formative  art,  drawing  is  of  fundamental  importance. 
The  architect  should  be  able  to  transfer  to  the  paper,  with  ease, 
grace,  and  facility,  that  which  he  conceives  in  the  mind.  “With- 
out this  power  he  is  unworthy  the  name  of  architect.”  In  the 
process  of  making  drawings  the  architect  repeatedly  goes  over 
the  careful  and  finished  work  of  his  assistants,  making  fresh 
suggestions,  modifications,  or  amendments,  with  a free  hand. 
Finally  the  finished  drawings  are  made,  adapted  to  a scale, 
and  from  these  estimates  are  formed  by  the  builders,  in- 
cluding all  the  specifications  descriptive  of  the  nature  and  cost 
of  materials,  and  the  labor  and  time  necessary  for  the  completion 
of  the  work.  What  are  termed  “ working-drawings”  are  likewise 
made,  for  actual  use  upon  the  ground.  The  preparation  of 
working-drawings  involves  a thorough  knowledge  of  projection 
drawing.  They  include  samples  of  various  parts  of  the  con- 
struction, of  every  important  detail  respecting  the  mason-work, 
the  cutting  and  framing  of  timbers  and  trusses,  the  carving  of 
ornaments — in  short,  they  serve  as  guides  for  workmen  of  all 
kinds,  who,  as  a general  thing,  are  incapable  of  executing  the 
simplest  task  without  rule  or  compass.  The  thorough  architect, 
therefore,  comprehends  the  mathematician  and  the  engineer. 
He  must  be  conversant  with  the  branches  of  mathematics  relat- 
ing to  stone-cutting  and  warped-surfaces,  with  the  nature  and 
strength  of  materials,  with  the  proportion  of  weight  to  its  just 
support,  and  with  all  that  pertains  to  the  forces  that  are  active 
in  the  arch. 

All  the  old  architects  claimed  that  a knowledge  of  anatomy 
was  useful  to  the  architect : Vitruvius,  Brunelleschi,  and  Michael 
Angelo  agree  in  this.  Every  fine  architecture  frankly  expresses 
its  anatomy.  It  aims  not  to  conceal  its  construction,  but  to  ex- 
press in  the  externals  some  suggestion  of  that  which  is  within. 
Thus  we  find  its  masses  and  its  general  forms  determine  the 
character  of  the  parts  and  the  details.  Many  principles  of  con- 
struction have  been  directly  derived  from  the  anatomy  of  the 
human  form. 

In  addition  to  this,  the  finished  architect  must  carry  the  sen- 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


77 


sibilityof  the  painter  and  the  sculptor  into  his  work.  He  should 
understand  the  use  of  color,  in  its  harmonies  and  contrasts ; and 
the  values  of  relief  resting  in  sculptured  ornament.  In  short, 
his  requirements,  both  with  respect  to  science  and  art,  are  of 
such  a character,  and  so  numerous,  that  one  may  well  exclaim  — 
as  did  Rasselas,  when  the  necessary  qualifications  of  the  poet 
were  enumerated — “ Enough,  for  you  have  convinced  me  that  no 
man  can  be — an  architect.” 

Mr.  Ruskin,  who  has  been  a close  student  of  architecture, 
and  who  has  attained  in  that  branch  of  art  a high  reputation  as 
a critic,  even  among  professional  architects,  declares  that,  in  his 
opinion,  “ no  person  who  is  not  a great  sculptor,  or  painter,  can 
be  an  architect.  If  he  is  not  a painter  or  sculptor,  he  can  only 
be  a builder.  The  three  greatest  architects  hitherto  known  to 
the  world,”  he  says,  “ were  Phidias,  Giotto,  and  Michael  Angelo  ; 
with  all  of  whom  architecture  was  only  their  play,  sculpture  and 
painting  their  work.  All  great  works  of  architecture  in  exist- 
ence,” he  continues,  “ are  either  the  work  of  single  painters  or 
sculptors,  or  of  societies  of  painters  and  sculptors.”  A Gothic 
cathedral  he  defines  as  “ a piece  of  the  most  magnificent  associa- 
tive sculpture.”  This  he  says  in  defence  of  his  proposition  that 
“ ornamentation  is  the  principal  part  of  architecture.”  Profes- 
sional architects,  I may  add,  take  exception  to  this.  They  hold 
that  “the  true  nobility  of  architecture  consists  not  in  decoration, 
but  in  the  disposition  of  the  masses,  and  that  architecture  is,  in 
fact,  the  art  of  proportion.”  If  the  proportions  of  a building  are 
bad,  no  amount  of  decoration  will  serve  to  lend  to  it  a pleasing 
or  impressive  effect.  Undoubtedly,  underlying  every  idea  of 
detail,  proportion  is  fundamental  in  architecture.  If  we  dissect 
a temple  of  the  Greeks — the  Parthenon,  for  instance — we  find 
the  principal  features  of  the  facade  may  be  defined  as  follows : 
a triangular  form,  termed  the  pediment , resting  on  a horizontal 
parallelogram,  termed  the  entablature , which  is  supported  by 
eight  vertical  props,  or  columns,  called  the  peristyle.  These 
three  principal  features  explain  the  construction — vertical  posts, 
supporting  a horizontal  beam,  on  which  rests  the  roof,  sloped  to 
shed  rain.  Following  the  order  in  which  these  were  defined  and 
ornamented,  we  learn  that  the  proportions  of  length,  breadth, 
and  height  were  then  determined.  The  columns  were  consid- 


78 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


cred  with  reference  to  their  true  proportions,  and  with  reference 
to  the  intervening  spaces.  Their  vertical  lines  were  found  to  be 
so  pleasing  that  these  were  multiplied  by  fluting  the  columns. 
The  entablature  was  spaced  horizontally,  and  then  vertically, 
by  adding  the  tryglyphs.  Lastly  metopes,  or  carved  reliefs,  were 
inserted  between  the  tryglyphs,  and  the  pediment  was  filled  in 
with  sculpture.  Thus  construction  gradually  blossomed  into 
architecture. 

In  the  early  forms  of  architecture  the  mass  preponderates 
even  to  a disproportion  of  weight  to  its  just  support — as  in  the 
Egyptian.  In  the  Grecian,  symmetry , or  weight  subjugated  by 
science,  is  felt  to  be  the  marked  characteristic  ; while  in  the 
Gothic,  weight  is  vanquished  by  the  arch,  and  we  find  space 
superseding  mass.  Underlying  these  elemental  features,  the 
fundamental  principle  is  that  of  proportion.  The  history  of  every 
art  reveals  a natural  development  or  growth.  The  theory  of  evo- 
lution becomes  strikingly  manifest  in  their  successive  changes. 
The  earliest  builders  could  not  calculate  the  proportion  requi- 
site between  superincumbent  weight  and  its  just  support;  and 
they  erred  on  the  right  side,  by  providing  superabundant  strength 
to  carry  their  intended  burden.  “ We  observe  how,  by  degrees, 
every  architecture  becomes  slimmer  and  lighter  as  experience  has 
brought  these  proportions  to  the  test.”  The  Egyptian  is  heavier 
than  the  Greek ; and  likewise  after  the  Doric  comes  the  Ionic 

r 

then  the  Corinthian,  and  at  last  the  Composite,  each  order  being 
lighter  in  construction  than  its  predecessor.  Abundant  evidence 
remains  to  prove  that  the  heavier  construction  of  remoter  periods 
was  not  based  upon  any  accurate  calculation  of  ratio  between 
support  and  weight — the  first  went  beyond  the  demands  of  the 
second.  In  like  manner,  at  a later  period,  we  pass  from  the 
Norman,  through  the  intermediate  stages  of  pointed  architec- 
ture, to  the  Flamboyant  or  Decorated.  We  find  the  architects 
of  the  sixteenth  century  “ fearlessly  altering  the  old  Norman 
arches  into  the  pointed,  and  round  massive  piers  into  slender 
clustered  columns  ; thus  cutting  out  masses  of  sustaining  mate- 
rial without  apprehension  of  insecurity.”  In  the  same  manner 
the  walls  undergo  a change.  The  apertures  for  windows  are  en- 
larged until  they  absorb  the  greater  part  of  the  spaces  between 
the  supports  sustaining  the  groined  arches,  while  these  supports- 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


79- 


are  reinforced  with  buttresses  and  flying  buttresses,  and  thus 
the  bearing  lines  are  continued  through  a succession  of  curves 
or  angles  to  the  very  ground,  quite  without  the  walls.  We  find, 
therefore,  in  the  Gothic,  vast  spaces  enclosed,  with  very  little 
massive  material  used  in  construction.  Science  thus  reinforces 
art,  and  by  its  subtile  laws  enables  the  architect  thus  to  subju- 
gate matter. 

The  three  grand  divisions  in  architecture  originated  in  the 
three  methods  of  covering  a space;  and  these  three  are  pure,  says 
Mr.  Ruskin,  exactly  in  proportion  to  the  simplicity  and  direct- 
ness with  which  they  express  the  condition  of  roofing  on  which 
they  are  founded.  The  Greek  is  the  architecture  of  the  lintel ; 
the  Roman,  that  of  the  round  arch ; and  the  Gothic,  that  of  the 
gable. 

“ The  most  perfect  example  of  the  Greek  is  the  Parthenon. 
The  Roman  divides  into  eastern  and  western — Byzantine  and 
Lombardic.  Of  the  former,  St.  Mark’s,  Venice,  is  the  most  per- 
fect example ; of  the  latter,  the  Duomo  at  Pisa.  The  Gothic 
likewise  divides  into  eastern  and  western  branches — the  Arabian 
and  the  European:  the  latter  may  be  termed  the  pure  Gothic. 
In  the  Greek,  the  Western-Roman,  and  the  Western-Gothic,  the 
roof-mark  is  the  gable ; in  the  Eastern-Roman  and  Eastern- 
Gothic,  it  is  the  dome.”  These  distinctions  of  Mr.  Ruskin  are 
both  accurate  and  simple,  and  once  fixed  in  the  memory  they 
will  serve  to  explain  much  that  is  fundamental  in  the  principal 
distinctions  of  architecture. 

But  a slight  acquaintance  with  Grecian  architecture  will  en- 
able us  to  see  that  the  effect  of  symmetry  and  elegance  was  based 
upon  a perfected  system  of  proportion.  The  general  proportions 
of  the  Tetrastyle , or  four-column  porticoes,  was  based  upon  the 
square,  the  height  being  equal  to  the  breadth.  One  third  is  given 
to  the  supports,  the  same  to  the  intercolumniations,  and  a like 
area  to  the  entablature,  or  load  supports.  The  proportions  of 
the  Hexastyle,  or  six-column  porticoes  of  Doric  temples,  were 
comprised  within  a parallelogram  of  a square  and  a half.  .The 
relative  proportions  of  the  entablature,  the  columns,  and  the 
intercolumniations,  are  the  same — each  comprising  one  third  of 
the  general  space  enclosed  by  the  outline  of  the  entire  facade. 
The  Octastyle,  or  eight-columned  portico,  of  which  the  Parthenon 


8o 


THE  PRINCE  TON  RE  VIE  IF. 


is  the  most  perfect  example,  comprises  the  double  square,  hav- 
ing twice  the  number  of  columns  that  are  found  in  the  tetrastyle. 
The  proportions  are  relatively  the  same — one  third  to  the  sup- 
ports, and  a like  area  each  to  the  entablature  and  the  intercol- 
umniations.  The  Roman  Octastyle,  as  exemplified  in  the  Pan- 
theon, divides  the  intercolumniations  equally  with  the  solids — 
that  is,  with  the  columns  and  entablature  combined.  The  Pan- 
theon portico  is  a double  square  without  the  pediment,  and  in 
this  respect  the  Romans  differed  from  the  Greeks. 

The  vertical  and  horizontal  lines  of  Greek  architecture — the 
outlines  of  the  columns,  and  the  lines  of  the  architrave — are 
found,  on  close  investigation,  to  differ  in  reality  from  their  ap- 
pearance. Penrose  subjected  some  of  the  temples  to  mathe- 
matical measurements,  and  determined  the  nature  of  these  varia- 
tions— or  at  least  proved  their  existence — without  penetrating 
to  their  origin  or  cause,  except  so  far  as  to  infer  that  they  were 
designed  to  overcome  certain  optical  illusions,  and  render  an 
increased  effect  of  elegance.  Thus  the  architrave,  which  has  the 
appearance  of  being  perfectly  horizontal,  was  found  to  be  slightly 
arched — perhaps  to  correct  any  optical  interference  of  the  slop- 
ing lines  of  the  pediment.  This  was  common  to  all  their  temples, 
but  in  the  Parthenon  the  curve  was  applied  to  the  sides  also. 
The  columns,  likewise,  which  appeared  to  be  bounded  by  straight 
lines,  were  found  to  have  a convex  profile,  very  slight  indeed 
(in  the  Parthenon  it  is  only  of  the  whole  height),  and  this 
outline  was  in  the  form  of  a very  delicate  hyperbolic  curve. 
Another  peculiarity  of  the  Greeks  was  that  of  making  the 
columns  of  their  temples  slope  inward,  very  slightly  it  is  true, 
but  with  a uniformity  that  evidently  was  the  result  of  design — 
it  may  be,  to  increase  the  impression  of  strength.  All  the  curved 
lines  used,  says  Penrose,  were  either  hyperbolas  or  parabolas. 
“ Whatever  process  of  reasoning  was  employed  in  arriving  at 
these  extreme  niceties,  the  Greeks  evidently  attached  the  highest 
importance  to  fulfilling  the  laws  deduced  with  such  accuracy.” 

Accurate  measurements  having  been  recently  applied  to 
Lincoln,  Salisbury,  and  other  of  the  English  Gothic  cathedrals, 
the  results  obtained  show  conclusively  the  mathematical  basis  of 
all  true  proportion  in  this  architecture  as  well  as  in  the  Grecian. 
Indeed,  we  must  concede  that  harmonious  proportions,  whether 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART. 


8l 


applied  to  form,  sound,  or  color,  have  their  mathematical  ratios 
underlying  their  effects,  producing  harmonious  or  discordant, 
agreeable  or  disagreeable  impressions. 

The  proportions  of  Gothiq  architecture  have  not  the  fixity  of 
the  Grecian  system : they  differ  in  German,  French,  and  English 
cathedrals.  The  general  plan  which  prevails  extensively  in 
Gothic  architecture  is  that  of  the  cross.  In  the  East  the  ground- 
plan  is  that  of  the  Greek  cross;  in  the  West  it  is  the  Latin 
cross.  The  latter,  says  Gwilt,  being  divided  into  squares,  gives 
3,  5,  and  7 as  the  ruling  numbers — the  arms  and  centre  equal 
three  squares ; the  whole  number,  omitting  the  centre,  equal 
five;  and  seven  is  the  sum  of  the  length  and  width.  This,  ac- 
cording to  descriptive  geometry,  gives  the  development  of  the 
cube.  These  numbers  have  been  found  to  predominate  in  the 
proportional  measurements  of  a large  number  of  the  best  Gothic 
cathedrals.  I will  not  insist  upon  the  absolute  accuracy  of  any 
such  system  of  measurement ; but  through  increased  attention 
lately  given  to  searching  out  these  proportions,  by  measuring  the 
surfaces,  solids,  and  spaces  of  Gothic  architecture,  they  have  been 
found  to  prevail  extensively.  That  some  like  system  must  have 
been  employed  in  structures  of  such  vast  extent,  we  cannot 
doubt.  It  would  have  been  impossible  to  preserve  symmetry 
and  elegance  on  a scale  so  extensive  without  it.  The  proportion 
of  height  to  breadth,  which  varies  considerably  in  English  and 
continental  Gothic,  is  yet  conducive  to  symmetry  and  beauty  in 
both  instances.  Pugin  declares  that,  when  he  began  the  study  of 
English  Gothic,  he  conceived  the  proportions  to  be  very  defec- 
tive, and  decidedly  inferior  to  those  employed  in  continental 
cathedrals.  But  on  closer  acquaintance  he  perceived  that  the 
distinctions  were  such  as  indicated  a distinct  development  of 
Gothic  architecture,  and  upon  laws  peculiar  to  this  development. 
The  greater  length  of  nave  is  peculiar  to  English  Gothic,  while 
the  continental  is  narrow  and  higher. 

The  Roman  and  Gothic  roofs  are  divided  into  two  parts : 
the  lower,  or  visible  vaulting,  and  the  upper,  or  roof-mask,  which 
protects  the  lower  from  the  weather.  “ Thus  we  have  the  arch 
for  the  bearing  line  below,  and  the  gable  for  the  protecting  line 
above.”  The  Roman  has  a flattened  gable  surmounting  a round 

arch;  the  Gothic,  a high-peaked  gable  surmounting  a pointed 
6 


82 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


arch.  These  simple  features,  in  their  variations  respecting  the 
arch  and  the  roof-mask,  enable  us  to  distinguish  these  two  archi- 
tectures clearly.  These  distinctions  are  repeated  throughout 
the  details,  as  well  as  in  the  general  forms.  “ Romanesque  and 
Gothic  buildings  are  more  or  less  Roman  or  Gothic  in  propor- 
tion to  the  number  of  their  respective  forms  that  we  find  united 
in  them,”  says  Mr.  Ruskin.  Thus  we  find  the  semicircular  arch 
of  the  Romanesque  employed  throughout  the  details  and  orna- 
ments, as  in  the  facade  of  the  Cathedral  of  Pisa ; and  in  the  early 
Saxon  and  Norman  architecture  of  England.  In  the  Gothic, 
the  pointed  arch,  with  its  high  gable,  supplies  the  forms  that 
everywhere  prevail  throughout  this  style.  It  is  by  the  study  of 
these  details,  no  less  than  the  general  forms — the  vaultings  of 
the  nave  and  aisles,  and  their  respective  roofings — that  we  arrive 
at  a perception  of  the  distinctions  and  merits  of  Gothic  archi- 
tecture. 

About  the  end  of  the  twelfth  and  the  beginning  of  the  thir- 
teenth century,  a change  took  place  in  the  architecture  of 
Europe.  The  flat  southern  roof  wras  superseded  by  the  high- 
pitched  northern  covering  of  ecclesiastical  edifices,  and  its  intro- 
duction brought  with  it  the  use  of  the  pointed  arch  in  place  of 
the  round,  or  semicircular ; and  this  was  a necessary  conse- 
quence, for  the  roof  and  vaults,  being  thus  raised,  necessitated  a 
change  in  the  combination  of  general  forms.  Heavy  roofs,  with 
few  ribs,  and  great  width  of  vault  carried  by  massive  walls  with 
small  openings,  are  characteristic  of  Romanesque  work.  Its 
successor  was  exactly  the  reverse — the  subdivision  of  roofing 
into  a collection  of  light  ribs  and  groined  work ; the  growth  of 
the  engaged  or  disengaged  pillars  into  the  lines  of  the  vaulting; 
the  substitution  of  clustered  columns  for  massive  round  pillars ; 
and  the  large  windows,  both  in  the  clere-story  and  the  main 
walls,  made  so  large  that  the  walls  often  appear  to  be  merely 
the  frames  of  these,  but  secured  against  the  lateral  thrust  of  the 
arches  by  flying-buttresses  that  offer  resisting  points.  The 
transition  from  the  Romanesque,  or  Norman,  to  the  Gothic  was 
beautifully  expressed  by  the  substitution  of  clustered  shafts  for 
plain  round  pillars.  These  groups  of  slender  supports  spring 
aloft  with  great  lightness,  disappearing  in  the  varied  foliage  of 
their  numerous  capitals,  and  then  again  rising  beyond  the  clere- 


THE  ARCHITECT  AND  HIS  ART.  83 

story  they  soar  aloft  and  disappear  in  the  groined  vaultings  of 
the  roof. 

“ The  eye  requires,  on  a slender  shaft,  a more  spreading  capi- 
tal than  it  does  on  a massy  one,  and  a bolder  mass  of  capital  on 
a small  scale  than  on  a large.”  But  while  the  eye  is  thus  agree- 
ably impressed  with  the  beauty  of  the  capital,  its  actual  use,  or 
service,  is  “ to  gather  the  bearing  forces  of  the  upper  masonry 
and  concentrate  them  upon  the  shaft.” 

Endless  change  without  repetition  is  a characteristic  of  the 
best  Gothic.  The  source  of  its  inspiration  was  found  in  nature. 
Variety  under  general  uniformity  is  one  of  nature’s  laws  which 
the  Gothic  architect  emulated.  The  capitals,  the  shafts,  the 
traceries,  the  carvings — all  weave  a harmony  of  variety  in  unity 
throughout  this  architecture.  The  round,  the  angular,  the 
spiral,  and  the  grooved  shafts  give  a varied  and  complex  assem- 
blage of  lines  that  entice  the  eye  aloft,  as  religious  aspirations 
do  the  soul.  The  Gothic  cathedral  is  avast  aspiration  transfixed 
and  petrified,  and  as  such  it  is  one  of  the  grandest  embodiments 
of  religious  fervor — the  bodying  forth  of  a great  Christian  im- 
pulse. Compared  with  this  the  small  Grecian  temple  has  a 
finite  fixity,  a completely  compassed,  finished,  and  intellectually 
rounded  end  and  defined  character  that  is  an  end  in  itself — tho 
one  of  extreme  beauty.  Architecture  presents  a field  so  vast,  so 
varied,  and  so  suggestive  of  the  greatest  triumphs  of  the  human 
mind,  that  it  is  impossible,  within  the  limits  assigned  me  in  this 
article,  to  give  more  than  a few  bald  suggestions  of  its  scope  and 
character. 

The  dome  presents  a subject  of  extraordinary  interest,  and 
there  are  few  things  more  fascinating  in  literature  than  Vasari’s 
account,  in  his  life  of  Brunelleschi,  of  the  building  of  the  great 
double  dome  of  the  cathedral  at  Florence,  and  of  Michael 
Angelo’s  erection  of  that  of  St.  Peter’s,  at  Rome. 

The  Indian  minar,  the  Turkish  minaret,  the  Italian  campa- 
nile, the  Gothic  spire,  the  Norman  tower,  the  Saxon  belfry,  ate, 
in  themselves,  beautiful  creations.  “To  build  high  has  been  the 
aspiration  of  all  great  builders  in  every  country  where  architec- 
ture has  had  any  share  in  the  expression  of  life  and  power  and 
these  structures  were  “ raised  to  be  seen  from  a distance,  to  cry 
from,  or  to  swing  bells  in.” 


84 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


One  cannot  put  too  high  an  estimate  upon  the  power  of 
architecture  to  impress  human  sensibility,  or  inspire  profound 
thought.  If  any  one  doubts  this  power,  let  him  make  a pil- 
grimage to  its  shrines.  There  is  no  mere  description  that  will 
more  than  dimly  suggest  the  sensations  experienced  on  first 
entering  those  vast  temples  of  worship.  It  is  not  the  skill  of 
the  architect  we  dwell  upon  in  recalling  those  lasting  impressions 
that  overawed  the  mind  and  lifted  the  thought  on  wings  as  we 
entered  their  solemn  aisles  and  stood  beneath  their  spacious 
vaults.  But  it  is  the  voice  of  art  that  speaks  so  eloquently 
through  dumb  but  expressive  silence — as  in  the  struggle  of 
irruptive  and  dazzling  light  pouring  through  lofty  stained  win- 
dows, and  dying  away  in  the  solemn  depths  of  shade  that  fill  the 
vast  interior  spaces  of  the  cathedral.  All  these  combined  effects 
of  light,  shadow,  color,  space,  and  beautiful  forms,  that  are  the 
delight  of  the  beholder,  were  once  but  a thought  in  the  mind  of 
the  architect.  To  his  art  all  other  arts  are  made  tributary. 

A recent  effort  of  Wagner,  the  composer,  to  unite  the  arts 
under  one  great  musical  supremacy,  was,  in  a sense,  but  a dim 
reflection  of  that  grand  mediaeval  idea  embodied  in  the  cathe- 
dral— for  while  the  thought  was  then  expanded  and  lifted  by 
the  vast  and  solemn  architecture,  the  eye  fell  upon  the  sacred 
subjects  of  pictorial  art,  and  saintly  forms  carved  in  stone.  The 
ear  too  was  filled  with  the  grand  waves  of  the  organ  and  the 
solemn  cadence  of  chanted  verse.  Thus  all  the  senses  were  made 
avenues  through  which  the  mind  and  sensibility  were  blended 
in  one  common  aspiration  of  joy.  Poetry,  painting,  sculpture, 
music,  and  architecture  were  thus  harmoniously  united  in  one 
voice — the  voice  of  art. 


John  F.  Weir. 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERN- 
MENT. 


HE  rapid  growth  of  the  United  States  has  developed  a 


J-  new  want  in  our  system  of  government.  In  very  general 
terms  it  may  be  defined  as  the  need  of  securing  in  some  efficient 
way  a closer  intercommunication  and  harmony  of  action  be- 
tween the  separate  States  in  matters  of  purely  State*  jurisdiction. 
It  is  the  object  of  this  essay  to  point  out  precisely  the  nature 
and  exigency  of  the  want  referred  to,  and  to  suggest  means  of 
supplying  it. 

The  United  States  in  relation  to  foreign  powers  is  a nation 
possessing  all  the  attributes  of  an  undivided  sovereignty;  but 
in  its  internal  organization  and  government,  and  in  the  relations 
of  the  several  States  to  each  other,  the  United  States  is  in  only 
a very  qualified  sense  a nation  ; it  is  rather  a congeries  of  inde- 
pendent powers.  Viewed  from  within,  the  States  are  merged 
in  the  federal  government,  or  subordinated  to  it,  in  really  few 
particulars,  and  those  particulars  not  the  ones  that  enter  most 
deeply  into  the  development  and  life  of  a people.  All  foreign 
relations,  including  war  and  commerce,  naturalization,  bank- 
ruptcy, coinage  of  money,  post-offices,  patents  and  copyrights, 
and  the  suppression  of  insurrections  and  invasions — this  is  a 
substantially  complete  list  of  the  interests  committed  to  the 
federal  government,  and  as  to  these  the  States  are  welded  to- 
gether into  national  unity.  But  in  all  matters  other  than  those 
above  enumerated  each  State  is  an  independent  sovereignty, 
practically  unhampered  by  the  Union,  and  holding  to  the  other 
States,  in  law  and  in  fact,  the  relations  of  a foreign  government. 

These  statements  are  truisms,  but  many  of  the  consequences 
they  involve  are  practically  under-estimated.  The  legal  separa- 


86 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


tion  and  independence  of  the  States  from  each  other  is  greater, 
and  the  constitutional  power  of  the  federal  government  to  con- 
trol or  supplement  State  action  is  far  more  limited,  than  the 
masses  of  the  people  are  disposed  to  believe.  But  it  is  a fact 
that  in  most  of  those  interests  that  bear  vitally  upon  the  pros- 
perity and  well-being  of  a people,  the  separate  government  of 
each  State  is  absolute  and  supreme.  Each  State  has  its  own 
code  of  civil  law  presiding  over  all  the  transactions  and  conduct 
of  daily  life,  its  own  criminal  jurisprudence,  its  own  mass  of 
judicial  decisions  interpreting  its  written  and  unwritten  law. 
Each  State  pursues  its  own  methods  in  all  that  relates  to  the 
security  of  life  and  of  property  within  its  borders ; has  its  own 
system  of  taxation,  its  own  system  of  education,  its  own  system 
of  public  charities.  There  is  no  social  relation  and  hardly  a 
phase  of  individual  life  in  which  the  power  and  influence  of  the 
State  are  not  vastly  greater  than  those  of  the  federal  govern- 
ment. 

These  various  State  codes  and  methods  and  systems  that 
flow  through  the  very  arteries  of  social  and  of  individual  life  are 
widely  diverse,  and  are  often  in  sharp  conflict  with  each  other. 
This  discordance  and  conflict  between  the  laws  and  institutions 
of  the  different  States  present  one  of  the  gravest  evils  in  our 
government.  The  wrongs  resulting  from  it  are  hostile  to  the 
interests  and  growing  national  spirit  of  the  people,  and  they  are 
wrongs  without  a remedy  ; there  is  no  organized  instrumentality 
for  their  correction  within  the  four  corners  of  our  system  of 
government.  For  these  reasons  the  evil  has  appealed  to  revo- 
lutionary methods  for  its  cure,  and  the  fact  suggests  grounds  of 
apprehension  for  the  future. 

The  “ conflict  of  laws”  has  formed  the  subject  of  large  trea- 
tises ; and  it  is  only  possible  within  present  limits,  by  the  selec- 
tion of  a few  instances,  to  illustrate  the  pernicious  operation  of 
such  conflict  upon  our  national  prosperity.  For  this  purpose 
consider,  first,  the  subject  of  State  taxation. 

In  all  the  States  personal  property  is  made  an  object  of  local 
taxation.  There  are  two  legal  principles  regarding  personal 
property,  both  equally  well  established,  which  may  be  applied 
in  its  taxation.  The  first  is  that  personal  property  has  no  situs 
apart  from  its  owner,  but  is  to  be  regarded  as  located  at  the 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  87 


place  where  the  owner  is  domiciled.  The  other  principle  is  that 
each  State  has  supreme  jurisdiction  over  all  persons  and  over 
all  property  actually  within  its  boundaries.  A resident  of  New 
Jersey  owning  personal  property  in  Massachusetts  is  personally 
subject  to  the  jurisdiction  of  New  Jersey  and  taxable  there; 
and,  under  the  legal  fiction  that  all  personal  property,  wherever 
located  in  fact,  is  legally  situated  at  the  place  of  the  owner’s 
domicile,  New  Jersey  may  assert  the  right  to  levy  taxes  on 
account  of  the  property  in  Massachusetts.  On  the  other  hand, 
Massachusetts,  invoking  the  second  principle  above  stated, 
claims  supreme  jurisdiction  over  the  same  property  on  the 
ground  that  it  is  actually  within  the  State,  and  imposes  a tax 
upon  it.  And  thus  the  owner  is  compelled,  under  strictly  legal 
principles,  to  pay  taxes  for  the  same  property  in  both  States. 
Suppose,  further,  that  the  property  is  subject  to  a mortgage 
held  by  a resident  of  Ohio : he,  too,  may  be  taxed  in  Ohio  upon 
the  value  of  his  security — that  is,  on  the  value  of  his  interest  in 
the  property ; and  so  the  same  property  may  be  the  object  of 
taxation  in  three  or  more  separate  States.  Yet  every  State  will 
declare  that  it  is  wrong  in  principle  to  subject  any  property  to 
double  taxation,  and  that  it  is  a grievous  hardship  upon  an 
owner  of  property,  paying  a tax  on  it  in  one  State,  to  endure 
the  exaction  of  a second  tax  in  another  State.  But  neither 
State,  while  asserting  the  true  principle,  can  yield  the  tax-payer 
any  relief.  The  courts  of  New  Jersey  must  declare:  You  are  a 
citizen  of  this  State  and  subject  to  its  laws ; under  the  system 
of  taxation  established  and  enforced  in  New  Jersey,  you  have 
been  legally  taxed,  while  the  hardship  of  paying  a second  tax  in 
another  State,  of  which  you  justly  complain,  is  attributable  to 
the  peculiar  laws  of  Massachusetts,  for  which  we  are  in  no  wise 
accountable.  The  courts  of  Massachusetts  are  equally  clear  in 
their  logic : We  cannot  remit  this  tax  without  reversing  the 
policy  and  system  which  the  State  of  Massachusetts  has 
adopted  of  taxing  all  personal  property  located  within  the 
limits  of  its  jurisdiction.  The  opposite  State  policies  not  .only 
inflict  on  the  individual  a hardship  for  which  there  is  no  redress, 
but  they  put  a direct  check  upon  the  employment  of  a common 
capital  in  different  States  and  upon  the  extension  of  industrial 
and  business  enterprises  from  one  State  into  others;  they  are 


88 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


repressive  in  their  operation,  inducing  the  confinement  of  each 
interest  within  the  limits  of  a single  State  jurisdiction,  and  so 
hampering  that  free  expansion  of  trade  which  is  essential  to  its 
healthy  growth. 

The  same  obstructive  influence  of  conflicting  State  laws 
manifests  itself  in  numberless  directions,  and  their  tendency  is 
always  blighting  on  the  material  prosperity  of  the  people. 
Negotiable  paper  is  the  circulating  medium  of  trade,  and  is 
indispensable  in  its  operations  very  much  as  free  air  is  needful 
for  the  processes  of  respiration.  The  laws  that  govern  the 
validity  and  negotiability  of  commercial  paper  ought  to  be  not 
only  uniform  but  absolutely  identical  throughout  a country 
whose  business  interests  are  closely  interwoven  from  the  Atlan- 
tic to  the  Pacific.  And  yet  the  utmost  diversity  prevails  among 
the  different  States  even  upon  such  elementary  questions  as — 
What  constitutes  a negotiable  note?  Who  is  a bona-fide  holder 
for  value?  What  is  a valuable  consideration?  Some  of  the 
States  have  usury  laws,  others  have  none ; the  consequences  of 
usury  are  widely  diverse,  in  some  States  forfeiting  the  entire 
debt,  in  others  only  the  interest,  in  others  involving  some  dif- 
ferent penalty,  and  in  others  making  usury  a criminal  mis- 
demeanor. A note  may  be  perfectly  good  in  one  State  and 
utterly  worthless  in  another,  while  its  possession  in  a third 
State  may  subject  the  owner  to  actual  imprisonment.  And  so 
it  is  that  negotiable  paper,  which  ought  to  circulate  with  the 
widest  freedom  and  security,  has  become  a most  precarious  and 
dangerous  article ; and  State  laws,  instead  of  fostering  inter- 
state commerce,  have  by  their  contrariety  hampered  and  dis- 
couraged it. 

It  is  perhaps  misleading,  however,  to  particularize  negotiable 
paper,  for  the  same  absence  of  uniformity  resulting  in  the  same 
pernicious  consequences  is  found  in  almost  every  other  species 
of  contract.  The  force  or  validity  of  a contract  may  be  sub- 
jected to  the  test  of  one  of  four  separate  systems  of  law : first, 
the  law  of  the  State  where  the  contract  was  made  ( lex  loci  con- 
tractus) ; second,  the  law  of  the  State  where  the  contract  was  to 
be  performed  (law  of  the  place  of  performance)  ; third,  the  law 
of  the  State  where  the  specific  property  affected  by  the  contract 
may  happen  to  be  situated  ( lex  loci  reisitce );  fourth,  the  law  of  the 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  89 

% 

State  where  the  action  is  brought  {lex  fori)]  and  in  some  classes 
of  actions  the  law  of  a fifth  State  may  be  controlling  the  State 
where  the  parties  are  domiciled  {lex  domicilii):  In  many  cases 

the  four  or  five  systems  of  State  law  thus  to  be  selected  from 
may  be  in  direct  conflict  with  each  other,  and  it  is  often  a mat- 
ter of  extreme  doubt  and  difficulty  to  determine  which  system 
is  properly  applicable  to  the  decision  of  a given  case.  And  even 
if  the  States  agree  in  the  settlement  of  that  preliminary  ques- 
tion, it  still  follows  that  the  same  kind  of  contract  made  in 
separate  States  is  valid  and  enforceable  in  one  State,  only  par- 
tially valid  in  a second,  and  wholly  illegal  in  a third.  It  is  a 
conclusive  presumption  of  law  that  every  person  contracting  in 
any  State  is  familiar  with  its  laws,  and  the  contract  is  construed 
as  if  the  parties  had  incorporated  in  it,  pro  hac  vice,  the  laws  of 
that  State.  And  yet  the  laws  and  legal  remedies  of  the  sepa- 
rate States  are  so  dissimilar  that  a prudent  lawyer  would  decline 
to  give  an  opinion,  without  making  special  examination,  upon  a 
simple  question  relating  to  the  laws  of  another  State  than  his 
own.  This  dissimilarity  is  not  confined  to  the  law  of  contracts : 
it  extends  to  wills,  intestacy,  the  law  of  corporations  and  part- 
nerships, domestic  relations,  and  through  the  whole  circle  of 
State  legislation. 

Apply  this  chaotic  jurisprudence  to  the  numerous  cases  that 
that  will  present  themselves  to  every  practical  mind.  Railroad 
corporations,  whose  lines  traverse  a dozen  States,  making  con- 
tracts for  transportation  in  each  of  them,  dealing  with  enormous 
properties  in  each  of  them,  incurring  liabilities  for  loss  or  negli- 
gence in  each  of  them,  and  yet  subject  to  a dozen  different  and 
conflicting  systems  of  law,  regulating  their  rights,  their  duties, 
and  their  liabilities ; insurance  companies  and  telegraph  com- 
panies, having  agencies  and  transacting  business  in  every  State 
in  the  Union  ; every  manufacturing  interest  and  every  commer- 
cial interest  having  business  relations,  more  or  less  extended,  in 
different  States,  and  yet  encountering  diverse  laws  as  they  pass 
each  State  boundary ; that  these  enterprises  can  yet  thrive  in 
the  face  of  such  adverse  and  fluctuating  circumstances  is  a mar- 
vellous proof  of  the  ingenuity  of  man  and  of  the  vital  energy  of 
trade  in  overcoming  obstacles. 

There  is  an  equal  diversity  in  the  forms  of  procedure  enforced 


90 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


and  in  the  remedies  yielded  by  the  courts  of  the  different 
States.  In  a word,  the  States  are  legally  foreign  powers  with 
reference  to  each  other,  and  their  systems  of  law  and  of  adminis- 
tration, so  far  as  they  clash  or  even  fail  to  harmonize,  are  for- 
midable obstacles  to  national  growth  and  unity.  To  foster 
industry  and  trade  you  must  give  certainty  and  consistency 
to  the  civil  laws  that  govern  them ; and  if  their  extension  to 
another  State  requires  a new  adjustment  or  a reorganization  to 
secure  the  same  legal  rights,  or  subjects  them  to  new  conditions 
under  a different  State  policy,  their  natural  development  is 
repressed  by  a check  that  is  always  pernicious  and  may  some- 
times prove  insurmountable.  The  material  and  moral  interests 
that  knit  the  country  together  are  regardless  of  State  lines, 
except  as  they  are  unduly  diverted  or  severed  by  incompatible 
State  laws  and  policies. 

The  moral  interests  of  the  country  suffer  as  well  as  its  mate- 
rial prosperity.  The  proper  treatment  of  marriage  and  divorce 
is  fundamental  to  the  morality  and  even  the  civilization  of  a 
people ; and  here,  at  least,  it  would  seem  that  substantial  uni- 
formity might  be  expected  among  the  States  forming  a single 
nation.  But  in  fact  the  divergence  between  State  laws  and 
adjudications  on  this  vital  subject,  and  the  injurious  conse- 
quences flowing  from  that  divergence,  present  a spectacle  that 
is  revolting  to  moral  sentiment.  The  possible  complications  of 
domestic  life  in  its  most  sacred  relations  that  may  actually  arise 
under  the  conflict  of  States  tax  the  ingenuity  of  the  imagina- 
tion. A citizen  of  the  United  States  may  be  legally  incapaci- 
tated to  contract  a marriage  in  one  State  which  the  laws  of  an- 
other State  sanction;  he  may  be  a married  man  legally  in  one 
State  and  at  the  same  time  an  unmarried  man  in  another  State; 
he  may  actually  have  one  lawful  wife  in  one  State  and  another 
lawful  wife  in  another  State.  But  the  real  facts  of  a case  re- 
cently adjudicated  in  the  New  York  Court  of  Appeals  will  give 
a keener  sense  of  the  conflict  of  laws  than  any  abstract  state- 
ment or  hypothetical  example  can  do. 

In  1871  Frank  M.  Baker  married  Sallie  West  in  Ohio;  he 
subsequently  abandoned  her  and  established  his  domicile  in  New 
York.  The  wife,  who  remained  domiciled  in  Ohio,  then  brought 
her  suit  in  the  courts  of  Ohio  to  obtain  a divorce;  judgment  of 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  gi 


absolute  divorce  was  rendered  in  her  favor  in  1874,  and  in  the 
following  year  she  married  one  C.  H.  Murray.  After  the  entry 
of  the  judgment  of  divorce  Baker  also  contracted  a second  mar- 
riage, marrying  one  Eunice  Nelson  within  the  State  of  New 
York.  He  was  then  indicted  in  New  York  for  bigamy;  he 
pleaded  in  defence  that  the  divorce  in  Ohio  having  terminated 
his  first  marriage,  left  him  free  to  marry  Eunice  Nelson.  It  was 
conceded  that  the  judgment  in  Ohio  was  regularly  obtained  in 
accordance  with  the  laws  of  that  State,  and  that  it  was  unques- 
tionably valid  in  Ohio ; but,  on  the  ground  that  the  defendant 
was  domiciled  and  actually  resident  in  New  York,  and  did  not 
appear  by  attorney  in  the  divorce  suit,  the  Court  of  Appeals 
held  that  the  divorce  was  not  binding  on  Baker  or  on  the  courts 
of  New  York;  the  divorce  was  held  valid  as  to  the  wife,  Sallie 
West,  but  a nullity  as  to  the  husband,  Frank  M.  Baker;  by  vir- 
tue of  it  the  wife  became  divorced  from  her  husband,  but  the 
husband  did  not  become  divorced  from  his  wife;  Frank  M. 
Baker  continued  to  be  the  husband  of  Sallie  West  when  he  mar- 
ried Eunice  Nelson,  and  hence  he  was  guilty  of  bigamy,  and 
was  sentenced  to  the  State  Prison  for  five  years,  and  there  he 
probably  is  to-day.  The  anomalies  involved  in  this  decision  are 
very  striking.  If  Sallie  West,  now  Mrs.  Murray,  should  move 
with  her  husband,  Mr.  C.  H.  Murray,  to  New  York,  she  would 
have  two  husbands  here — no,  the  subject  demands  the  utmost 
exactness  of  language — she  would  have  only  one  husband,  but 
two  husbands  would  have  her  as  their  lawful  wife.  Mr.  Baker 
has  never  been  deprived  of  her,  altho  Mr.  Baker  is  to  her  no 
relation,  for  she  was  divorced  but  he  was  not.  Sallie,  having 
been  legally  divorced,  had  a right  to  marry  Mr.  Murray,  was 
legally  married  to  him  in  Ohio,  and  the  validity  of  Mr.  Murray’s 
claim  to  her  must  be  recognized  even  by  the  courts  of  New 
York.  Regard  the  matter  now  from  Mr.  Baker’s  standpoint: 
Suppose  that  he  had  married  Eunice  Nelson  in  Rhode  Island 
instead  of  New  York,  and  had  gone  to  Ohio  upon  his  wedding 
tour ; the  courts  of  Rhode  Island  accept  the  Ohio  divorce  as 
valid,  and  Eunice  and  her  husband  consequently  set  out  on 
their  journey  a legally  married  couple  ; in  crossing  the  State  of 
New  York  Eunice  ceases  to  hold  any  lawful  relation  to  her  hus. 
band,  whose  New  York  wife  is  Sallie  West;  and,  on  reaching 


92 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


Ohio,  Mr.  Baker  ceases  to  be  a married  man  at  all,  for,  as  the 
decree  of  divorce  prohibited  him  from  marrying  again,  Ohio  will 
not  recognize  the  validity  of  the  subsequent  marriage  in  Rhode 
Island.1 

It  is  proper  to  observe,  that  the  decision  of  the  New  York 
Court  of  Appeals  in  the  case  cited  does  not  mark  any  new  de- 
parture, but  seems  to  be  sustained  by  the  weight  of  authority 
both  in  the  State  and  the  federal  courts.  This  case  is  a forci- 
ble illustration  of  the  inextricable  and  hopeless  confusion  that 
has  resulted  from  the  adoption  of  distinct  policies  by  the  sepa- 
rate States ; and  that,  too,  in  a matter  where  in  the  reason  of 
things  there  is  not  the  slightest  cause  for  divergence  from  abso- 
lute uniformity.  It  is  difficult  to  estimate  the  demoralizing 
effects  upon  the  people  of  such  subversion,  under  the  forms  of 
law,  of  relations  that  ought  to  be  held  sacred.  Add  to  this  the 
utterly  insoluble  questions  about  rights  of  property  and  legiti- 
macy of  offspring  growing  out  of  such  indeterminate  family  re- 
lations, and  the  conflict  of  laws  becomes  an  evil  that  is  insuffer- 
able— an  evil  that  in  some  way  and  by  some  means  must  be 
cured,  not  only  in  the  interest  of  decent  morality,  but  in  the 
interest  of  civilization  itself. 

The  illustrations  given  of  the  conflict  between  State  policies 
have  touched  but  a few  of  the  salient  points  of  the  subject;  it 
would  be  easy  to  trace  this  conflict  further  into  all  the  depart- 
ments of  State  legislation  and  State  administration,  and  to  de- 
tect the  injurious  and  anti-national  tendencies  of  it  in  many 
phases  of  the  life  and  development  of  the  people.  But  my  pres- 
ent object  has  been  accomplished  in  pointing  out  the  existence 
and  the  nature  of  the  evil ; that  it  is  an  evil,  and  that  the  coun- 
try needs  relief  from  it,  none  will  be  disposed  to  deny. 

It  was  intimated  at  the  outset  that  the  evil  complained  of 
had  been  developed  by  the  growth  of  the  United  States.  This 
is  true,  not  so  much  in  the  sense  that  the  divergence  of  State 
policies  has  been  increasing,  but  in  the  sense  that  the  changed 
conditions  of  our  national  growth  are  making  that  divergence  to 
be  felt  more  painfully,  and  its  effects  to  be  more  and  more  in- 

1 1 am  not  aware  that  this  last  point  has  ever  been  expressly  passed  upon  in 
Ohio,  but,  as  it  has  been  so  adjudicated  in  some  other  States,  it  answers  the  pur- 
pose of  a fair  illustration. 


ANTS  N A TIOiVAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  93 

jurious  with  every  step  of  our  progress.  At  the  foundation  of 
the  government  the  people  of  the  several  States  were  really  sep- 
arated in  policy  and  interests;  the  States  had  just  emerged  from 
the  condition  of  colonies,  and  were  but  partially  amalgamated. 
The  colonies  had  led  each  a separate  existence,  somewhat  aloof 
from  one  another  and  holding  toward  each  other  an  attitude  of 
jealousy  and  suspicion.  New  York  and  Connecticut  had  been 
traditionally  at  open  feud  ; the  existence  of  Rhode  Island  had 
been  a kind  of  standing  protest  against  what  was  there  deemed 
the  illiberal  policy  and  bigotry  of  Massachusetts;  New  Jersey, 
Pennsylvania,  and  Maryland  had  had  little  in  common  in  their 
origin  or  in  their  colonial  history,  and  the  Southern  colonies 
were  at  variance  with  the  Northern  in  their  political  govern- 
ments and  in  the  prevailing  sentiments  of  their  people.  Facili- 
ties for  intercourse  between  the  colonies  were  meagre,  and  in- 
stances of  social  commingling  or  of  business  connection  between 
their  inhabitants  were  of  comparatively  rare  occurrence.  The 
common  desire  for  independence  from  the  British  crown,  and 
the  sympathies  and  mutual  interests  developed  by  their  union 
in  the  Revolutionary  struggle,  constituted  the  bond  that  drew 
the  colonies  together  into  national  unity.  When  independence 
was  finally  achieved  the  new  States  retained  much  of  the  colo- 
nial exclusiveness,  and  shrank  from  anything  more  than  a very 
qualified  merger  of  themselves  in  a national  government.  The 
articles  of  confederation  served  rather  to  foster  the  jealousy  of 
the  States  than  to  knit  them  together  in  closer  union.  And 
when  the  Constitution  was  framed,  consolidating  the  States 
more  firmly,  and  depriving  them  of  some  of  the  elements  of  sov- 
ereignty, it  was  not  received  with  universal  enthusiasm  ; it  was 
only  after  years  of  reluctance  and  under  the  pressure  of  obvious 
policy  that  the  Constitution  was  finally  accepted  by  all  the 
States. 

These  sharp  lines  of  demarcation  between  the  States  have 
by  the  progress  of  time  become  nearly  obliterated  in  the  inter- 
ests and  temper  of  the  people,  while  legally  they  remain  as  at 
first.  It  admits  of  no  doubt  whatever  that  the  population  of 
the  United  States  is  vastly  more  homogeneous  and  more  truly 
national  in  spirit  than  it  was  in  its  beginnings.  This  is  probably 
true  even  of  the  Southern  States,  for  the  past  few  years  give 


94 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IF. 


hopeful  signs  that  the  wounds  of  the  civil  war  are  healing,  and 
that  the  South  is  slowly  growing  into  the  nation.  The  causes 
that  are  strengthening  the  bonds  between  the  people  are  as 
obvious  as  the  fact  itself.  The  civil  war  strongly  intensified  the 
sentiment  of  nationality;  it  brought  into  intimate  contact  and 
comradeship  large  bodies  of  men  from  every  section  ; it  cement- 
ed the  people  into  firm  unity  by  common  sympathies,  hopes, 
and  sufferings ; and  its  issue  was  the  distinct  triumph  of  the 
principle  of  union  over  the  principle  of  State  segregation.  The 
assassination  of  Lincoln,  and,  even  more,  the  assassination  of 
Garfield,  have  fused  the  people  into  a brotherhood  in  the  deep 
feeling  of  a common  grief.  The  material  interests  of  the  nation 
are  all  co-operating  in  every  direction  toward  the  same  result. 
Railroads  and  telegraphs  and  the  newspaper  press  are  daily 
drawing  the  people  into  closer  and  closer  contact ; the  develop- 
ment of  our  resources,  the  extension  of  business  and  industrial 
enterprises,  the  great  moral  and  social  movements  of  the  time 
— all  these  agencies  are  national  in  their  scope  and  tendency. 
State  lines  do  not  hem  in  the  circle  of  influences  that  regulate 
any  employment  of  capital  however  local,  or  any  industry  how- 
ever humble ; all  trade,  all  labor,  all  individual  activity  of  what- 
ever kind,  are  parts  of  one  national  life,  measured  by  one  common 
pulse  that  beats  alike  through  the  length  and  breadth  of  our  land. 

The  conflict  of  State  laws  is  directly  opposed  to  all  these 
nationalizing  tendencies  ; it  is  essentially  anti-national  in  its 
nature  and  far-reaching  in  its  pernicious  working.  Interests  of 
labor  and  of  capital  that  are  identical  throughout  the  land  are 
locally  hampered  or  distorted  in  their  development  by  incom- 
patible systems  of  State  laws  and  of  judicial  remedies  ; lines  of 
progress  that  are  naturally  independent  of  State  divisions  are 
intersected  by  State  boundaries,  and  are  apt  to  be  cut  off  or 
deflected  by  an  adverse  State  policy.  This  contrariety  of  State 
systems  has  no  justification  in  reason  or  necessity:  and  a sense 
of  incongruity  in  dissecting  a homogeneous  nation  into  thirty- 
eight  territorial  divisions  and  subjecting  these  divisions  to  sepa- 
rate and  distinct  governments  with  inharmonious  and  con- 
flicting laws  that  yet  have  supreme  local  jurisdiction  over  what 
concerns  most  deeply  the  life  and  character  of  the  whole  nation 
— a sense  of  incongruity  and  of  unwisdom  in  this  disintegrating 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  95 

policy  has  given  rise  to  that  tendency,  so  strongly  manifested 
of  late  years,  toward  centralization  of  power  in  the  federal  gov- 
ernment. The  want  of  harmony  between  the  States,  in  dealing 
with  interests  of  common  and  really  national  concern,  has 
seemed  to  many  a proof  that  the  States,  acting  apart,  are  not 
competent  to  govern  those  interests,  and  that  there  ought  to 
be  a central  power  which  should  secure  to  the  people  a common, 
or  at  least  a self-consistent,  government.  And  so  it  is  that 
in  the  conflict  of  State  laws  the  minds  of  the  people  turn  for  a 
remedy  to  the  federal  government. 

It  is  certain  that  the  federal  government  is  absolutely  power- 
less to  grant  any  relief,  or  to  exert  any  influence  which  shall 
tend  to  draw  the  States  toward  uniformity  or  harmony.  The 
limits  of  its  jurisdiction  are  rigidly  and  jealously  marked  by 
the  Constitution,  the  tenth  amendment  of  which  explicitly 
enacts  that  “ the  powers  not  delegated  to  the  United  States 
by  the  Constitution,  nor  prohibited  by  it  to  the  States,  are 
reserved  to  the  States  respectively  or  to  the  people.”  The  pro- 
visions of  the  Constitution  which  aim  to  secure  harmony  of 
State  action  are  strikingly  vague  as  well  as  few  and  simple. 
“ Full  faith  and  credit  shall  be  given  in  each  State  to  the  public 
acts,  records,  and  judicial  proceedings  of  every  other  State 
“ the  citizens  of  each  State  shall  be  entitled  to  all  the  privileges 
and  immunities  of  citizens  in  the  several  States  a fugitive 
from  justice  from  one  State  found  in  another  State  shall  be 
delivered  up  on  requisition  to  the  State  having  jurisdiction  of  the 
crime  ; the  United  States  shall  protect  each  State  from  invasion  ; 
and,  finally,  the  federal  courts  shall  have  jurisdiction  over  contro- 
versies between  two  or  more  States  or  between  citizens  of  dif- 
ferent States,  and  over  claims  made  by  one  State  against  citizens 
of  another  State ; not , be  it  marked,  over  claims  made  by  the 
citizens  of  one  State  against  another  State.  A State  cannot 
be  sued  except  by  another  State ; and  as  the  conflict  of  State 
laws  acts  injuriously  upon  the  citizens  of  the  States,  and  not 
upon  the  States  themselves  in  their  corporate  character,  the 
suffering  parties  cannot  bring  their  defendant  into  court.  But 
in  no  event  can  Congress  or  the  federal  judiciary  intervene 
between  the  States  in  any,  the  slightest  way,  without  subverting 
the  whole  system  and  theory  of  the  Union.  The  States,  in  all 


g6 


THE  PRIXCE TON  REVIEW. 


matters  not  delegated  to  the  United  States,  are  as  absolute  and 
supreme  as  the  United  States  is  in  its  sphere;  and  the  United 
States  has  no  more  right  to  restrain  the  freedom  of  State 
action,  touching  matters  of  State  jurisdiction,  than  a State  has 
to  override  the  legislation  of  Congress  upon  a topic  of  federal 
jurisdiction.  Two  limits  only  the  Constitution  sets  upon  the 
discord  and  wranglings  of  the  States:  (i)  they  shall  not  pro- 
ceed to  open  war,  actual  invasion  ; (2)  the  Supreme  Court  is 
vested  with  power  to  decide  “ controversies”  between  the 
States,  but  this  has  been  held  to  be  limited  to  controversies 
of  a judicial  nature,  not  touching  the  political  sovereignty  of 
each  State.1  The  fact  remains  that  the  federal  power  cannot 
be  invoked  to  reconcile  the  conflicting  policies  of  the  States 
upon  matters  not  expressly  delegated  by  the  Constitution  to 
the  United  States. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  discern  the  causes  that  have  led  the 
States  apart  on  divergent  lines  of  legislation  and  policy.  The 
variance  cannot  be  laid  to  the  charge  of  the  State  judiciaries. 
The  judges  of  the  State  courts,  who  as  a class  have  been  men 
of  broad  views  and  often  able  jurists,  have  been  keenly  sensible 
of  the  evils  attendant  upon  a conflict  of  judicial  decisions  ; they 
have  laboriously  collated  the  decisions  of  other  States  in  kindred 
cases  and  have  habitually  aimed  to  reconcile  and  harmonize 
them,  and  so  far  as  possible  to  follow  them.  But  the  differ- 
ences complained  of  are  inherent  in  the  laws  themselves,  in  the 
statutes  enacted  by  the  separate  State  legislatures ; and  it  is 
upon  these  bodies,  the  legislatures  of  the  several  States,  that 
rests  the  burden  of  accountability  for  the  diverse  and  conflict- 
ing systems.  The  evil  is  largely  the  natural  outcome  of  that 
worst  fact  in  our  political  history — that  politics  have  become 
a trade,  and  not  a science.  The  highest  intelligence  and  the 
most  sterling  moral  forces  in  the  community  have  kept  aloof 
from  politics,  and  have  delivered  over  the  control  of  caucuses 
and  political  parties,  and  hence  the  practical  administration  of 
government,  to  those  elements  of  society  that  are  not  rightfully 

1 1 do  not  overlook  the  restrictions  imposed  by  the  Constitution  upon  State 
laws,  that  they  shall  not  impair  the  obligation  of  contracts,  etc.,  for  these  restric- 
tions are  founded  upon  natural  right,  and  would  practically  be  enforced  without 
the  Constitution. 


ANTI-NATIONAL  THASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  97 

the  dominant  ones.  It  is  the  natural  result  that  State  legisla- 
tures fail  to  represent  the  best  intelligence  or  moral  purity  of 
their  constituencies,  and  are  apt  to  be  manipulated  by  ambi- 
tious leaders  who  are  skilled  in  intrigue  but  are  wholly  unfitted 
to  deal  with  broad  questions  of  statesmanship. 

There  are  other  causes  lying  deeper  than  the  personal  char- 
acteristics of  those  who  enact  the  laws.  There  are  no  adequate 
means  by  which  legislators,  however  honest  or  able,  can  acquaint 
themselves  with  precisely  what  the  real  needs  of  legislation  de- 
mand from  them ; in  acting  upon  a proposed  law  they  are  often 
ignorant  what  legislative  action  the  other  States  have  already 
adopted  upon  the  same  subject,  what  practical  difficulties  such 
legislation  in  other  States  has  encountered,  in  what  directions 
kindred  laws  have  clashed  in  different  States,  suggesting  dangers 
to  be  avoided  and  differences  to  be  harmonized  ; nor  can  they  ac- 
quire this  information,  so  essential  to  guide  their  action,  without 
studious  and  laborious  research,  for  which,  by  their  habits  and 
abilities,  they  are  utterly  unqualified.  There  is  no  official  bureau 
of  political  information,  no  official  organ  of  communication  be- 
tween the  States,  through  which  the  legislature  of  one  State  can 
readily  place  itself  en  rapport  with  the  other  States,  gain  authentic 
knowledge,  by  their  experience,  of  a common  want,  and  co- 
operate with  them  in  carrying  out  a defined  policy  with  intelli- 
gence and  efficiency.  So  the  State  sovereignties  plod  on  apart, 
each  in  the  path  of  its  own  narrow  policy,  legislating  only  for 
the  supposed  interests  of  its  own  commonwealth,  heedless  of 
harmony  with  its  sister  States,  and  practically  ignoring  the 
inter-State  conflict  of  jurisprudence.  But  meantime  a consoli- 
dated nation  has  sprung  up  and  has  outgrown  the  States ; the 
constriction  of  State  lines  and  of  local  laws  and  policies  is  gall- 
ing to  its  energy  and  its  growth ; and  there  has  arisen  among 
the  people  a yearning  (often  undefined,  but  yet  clearly  percep- 
tible) to  be  governed  by  a national  law  and  a firmly  centralized 
government. 

It  is  exactly  here,  in  my  judgment,  that  lie  the  weakness, and 
the  danger  in  the  system  of  government  devised  by  our  fathers. 
While  it  left  each  State  supreme  in  all  matters  not  delegated  to 
the  federal  government,  it  provided  no  agency  to  keep  the  States 
upon  parallel  lines  of  policy,  instituted  no  official  organ  of  po- 
7 


98 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  W. 


litical  communication  between  the  States,  established  no  instru- 
mentality to  harmonize  State  laws  or  to  reconcile  conflict  be- 
tween them  upon  matters  within  State  jurisdiction,  but  of 
national  concern.  The  civil  war  itself  was  a culminating  out- 
break through  this  very  flaw ; the  causes  that  were  visibly  lead- 
ing to  it  were  beyond  the  reach  of  the  government,  which  was 
powerless  to  act  until  they  had  ripened  into  actual  “ insurrec- 
tion.” And  the  same  absence  of  organized  channels  for  the 
peaceful  diffusion  of  a national  spirit  and  a national  polity,  the 
same  lack  of  official  agencies  to  disseminate  the  influence  of 
dominant  public  sentiment  and  the  comprehension  of  common 
public  interest,  which  made  the  war  inevitable,  have  been  sen- 
sibly felt  since  the  war  in  keeping  the  North  and  South  apart 
and  in  retarding  the  progress  of  reunion. 

The  proposed  remedy,  of  centralizing  power  in  the  federal 
government,  subverts  the  sovereignty  of  the  States,  and  is 
clearly  unconstitutional  and  revolutionary.  The  only  conserva- 
tive remedy  possible  must  rest  in  the  voluntary  action  of  the 
States  themselves  ; and  it  remains  to  inquire  what  new  measures 
are  best  adapted  to  bring  the  States  together  where  they 
have  diverged,  and  to  maintain  among  them  a homogeneous 
policy. 

This  inquiry,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  the  single  topic  of  mar- 
riage and  divorce,  has  recently  elicited  considerable  discussion. 
The  action  of  Congress  has  been  invoked,  and  in  other  quarters 
a constitutional  amendment  has  been  suggested  as  means  of 
securing  a uniform  System  of  laws  relating  to  marriage.  Presi- 
dent Woolsey,  in  a late  publication,  has  demonstrated  the  revo- 
lutionary character  of  efforts  to  obtain  relief  by  any  form  of 
federal  intervention  ; the  subject  of  marriage  and  divorce  is  one 
of  those  that  under  our  form  of  government  are  committed  to 
State  action  and  control,  and  it  cannot  be  transferred  to  the 
sphere  of  federal  jurisdiction  without  doing  violence  to  the  or- 
ganic system  on  which  the  union  of  the  States  is  based.  One 
mode  of  remedy  only  is  possible : the  States  themselves  must 
by  their  joint  action  construct,  and  must  severally  adopt,  a uni- 
form code  of  marriage  law.  The  redaction  of  such  a code  may 
be  accomplished  by  a national  convention  to  be  composed  of 
representatives  from  all  the  States,  selected  with  reference  to 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OF  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  99 


their  special  adaptation  to  the  task ; they  must  be  men  of  large 
juridical  experience  and  of  liberal  spirit,  competent  to  appre- 
hend the  precise  points  of  conflict,  and  to  act  with  a broad  com- 
prehension of  national  conditions  and  national  wants. 

The  work  of  such  a convention  should  extend  over  a far 
wider  field  than  the  single  subject  of  marriage  and  divorce  ; that 
is  one  only  of  the  multiform  instances  of  the  conflict  of  laws. 
The  whole  body  of  the  statute  law  of  the  States  needs  to  be 
fused  and  moulded  into  a harmonious  system.  A really  small 
part  of  the  legislation  of  a State  is  purely  local  and  special  in 
its  nature,  and  with  that  a national  convention  has  of  course  no 
concern  ; but  those  general  laws  that  affect  the  business  and  the 
industry,  the  material  and  the  moral  interests  of  the  people  as  a 
nation,  in  regard  to  which  the  circumstances  of  no  State  require 
a distinctive  or  isolated  policy,  should  be  framed  by  the  united 
wisdom  of  the  nation,  and  should  be,  as  nearly  as  possible,  iden- 
tical throughout  all  the  States.  Such  a national  code  of  laws, 
digested  by  a joint  convention,  and  then  adopted  and  enacted 
by  each  State,  is  the  only  effective  substitute  for  federal  cen- 
tralization, and  the  only  available  solution  of  the  present  con- 
flict of  States. 

In  the  judicial  enforcement  of  a national  code,  differences 
of  interpretation  would  unavoidably  be  developed  in  the  inde- 
pendent courts  of  the  separate  States.  To  harmonize  and  au- 
thoritatively settle  these  differences,  power  must  be  vested  in 
the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  to  exercise  an  appellate 
jurisdiction ; such  power,  if  not  already  involved  in  the  consti- 
tutional right  to  decide  “ controversies  between  the  States,”  is 
not  inconsistent  with  the  spirit  of  those  provisions  of  the  Con- 
stitution that  define  the  functions  of  the  federal  judiciary,  and 
a constitutional  amendment  expressly  conferring  the  required 
jurisdiction  would  be  wholly  germane  to  the  present  system. 

The  enactment  of  a uniform  system  of  State  law,  however, 
while  yielding  temporary  relief,  would  fail  to  establish  any  suf- 
ficient guaranty  for  the  future.  No  code  can  be  made  perfect 
or  remain  stationary.  Experience  and  the  changed  conditions 
of  progress  would  develop  the  constant  need  of  amendment  and 
of  extension;  and  the  States,  being  supreme  and  acting  sepa- 
rately, would  inevitably  diverge  as  they  have  done  in  the  past, 


IOO 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


until  the  urgency  of  the  conflict  of  laws  again  demanded  the  re- 
sort to  a national  convention. 

To  avert  this  prospective  conflict,  the  convention  or  council 
of  States  must  be  made  a permanent  body,  holding  annual  ses- 
sions, and  constituting  an  organ  of  official  and  diplomatic  com- 
munication between  the  States.  The  functions  of  the  council 
must  be  deliberative  and  advisory,  without  any  power  of  coer- 
cion, but  having  only  the  moral  force  that  would  attach  to  the 
collective  wisdom  of  leading  minds  from  all  the  States.  It  is  a 
remarkable  fact  that  while  each  of  the  governments  of  Europe 
finds  it  advisable  to  maintain  diplomatic  representatives  at  the 
seats  of  the  other  governments,  in  order  to  keep  itself  informed 
of  their  movements  and  to  secure  a certain  harmony  of  action, 
the  States  of  the  Union,  tho  legally  almost  as  foreign  to  each 
other  as  the  states  of  Europe  and  tho  infinitely  more  affected 
by  the  measures  and  the  policy  of  each  other,  yet  have  no  es- 
tablished agency  by  which  to  exert  any  influence  on  such  meas- 
ures and  policy  or  even  to  gain  authentic  information  of  them, 
and  they  have  no  official  means  of  communication  with  each 
other.  This  want  the  council  would  effectively  supply;  its 
members  would  be  in  close  and  constant  relations  with  the  leg- 
islatures and  judiciaries  of  the  several  States : defects  in  the 
practical  working  of  the  national  code,  proposed  new  measures 
of  general  legislation,  new  wants  developed  by  the  growing  in- 
terests of  the  nation,  would  be  reported  to  the  national  council 
from  every  district  throughout  the  length  and  breadth  of  the 
continent. 

With  these  national  and  inter-State  topics  the  council  would 
have  permanently  to  deal ; and  while  its  action  would  be  limited 
to  recommendations  which  would  not  be  legally  binding  on  the 
States  until  voluntarily  adopted  by  them,  the  recommendations 
would  necessarily  be  invested  with  a great  weight  of  authority. 
The  authority  would  attach  not  only  to  the  august  and  national 
character  of  the  council,  but  it  maybe  reasonably  hoped  would  be 
inherent  in  the  recommendations  themselves ; for  the  council 
would  occupy  a vantage-ground,  above  any  possible  State  legis- 
lature, in  discussing  a question  of  general  polity.  It  would 
have  at  its  command  boundless  resources  of  facts  gathered  from 
every  corner  of  every  State,  it  would  be  raised  above  local 


ANTI-NATIONAL  PHASES  OP  STATE  GOVERNMENT.  IOI 


prejudices,  and  all  its  deliberations  would  tend  to  broaden  its 
views  toward  a national  horizon.  In  recommending  any  public 
measure  or  in  stamping  with  its  disapproval  any  discordant 
State  action,  the  council  would  at  least  send  forth  to  the  coun- 
try a forcible  presentation  of  facts  and  of  argument,  directing 
public  attention  to  the  issue  and  enlightening  the  people  as  to 
its  bearings  in  a manner  that  would  ultimately  secure  its  adjust- 
ment. 

A single  instance  will  illustrate  the  utility  of  such  a body. 
Nearly  every  session  of  a State  legislature  is  marked  by  the 
creation  of  one  or  more  legislative  commissions  appointed  to 
investigate  and  report  upon  important  subjects  of  statute  regu- 
lation— taxation,  railroads,  prisons,  public  charities.  All  the 
topics  thus  referred  to  a#commission  have  bearings  broader  than 
the  limits  of  the  State,  and  most  of  them  involve  interests  that 
can  only  be  effectively  protected  by  community  and  concert  of 
action  between  the  States.  The  proposed  council  would  be 
eminently  suited  to  conduct  such  investigations  as  a joint  com- 
mission for  all  the  States;  while,  having  resources  wholly  unat- 
tainable by  any  local  body,  it  would  enjoy  the  unique  advan- 
tage (to  which  no  State  commission  can  ever  aspire)  of  address- 
ing itself  authoritatively  and  officially  to  all  the  States  alike.  It 
is  difficult  to  conceive  any  other  way  in  which  the  States  can  be 
practically  brought  into  uniformity  and  co-operation  upon  mat- 
ters in  which  they  all  have  really  identical  interests. 

The  practicability  of  the  scheme  itself  here  suggested  turns 
upon  the  possibility  of  inducing  the  States  to  unite  in  its  adop- 
tion. That  is  a matter  of  popular  political  education  and  dis- 
cussion. The  tendency  toward  federal  centralization  rests  on  a 
substantial  basis,  and  seeks  to  remedy  a substantial  evil ; those 
who  regard  the  tendency  as  a dangerous  one,  believing  that 
centralization  imports  the  eventual  breaking  up  of  the  republic 
by  its  own  weight  into  wholly  separate  and  independent  frag- 
ments, must  meet  the  tendency  by  the  substitution  of  a new  and 
better  remedy — they  must  neutralize  the  tendency  by  removing 
the  grounds  on  which  its  rests.  It  is  possible  that  two  or  more 
States  may  unite  in  the  establishment  of  a joint  convention  for 
the  codification  of  the  general  laws  of  those  States  or  of  the 
laws  relating  to  a single  topic.  The  advantageous  results  of 


102 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


even  such  a limited  convention,  it  is  believed,  would  be  so  visi- 
ble and  striking  as  to  induce  the  extension  of  its  scope  and  the 
participation  of  other  States,  until  the  movement  once  inaugu- 
rated might  grow  into  an  established  and  universal  system. 

The  great  difficulty  at  present  is  found  in  the  general  lack 
of  information  regarding  the  laws  and  institutions  of  the  several 
States,  and  in  the  prevailing  ignorance  touching  the  extent  and 
details  of  the  conflict  between  them.  Outside  the  limits  of  the 
legal  profession  men  know  of  this  conflict  only  in  a most  vague 
way,  except  as  they  are  conscious  of  having  themselves  suffered 
from  some  few  instances  of  it.  But  a national  council  of  the 
kind  suggested  would  be  an  efficient  agency  of  political  educa- 
tion for  the  people,  teaching  them  what  grave  wrongs  are  in- 
flicted in  the  name  of  law,  how  their  commerce  is  impeded  and 
their  industry  checked  and  their  trade  depressed  or  unduly 
stimulated  by  inharmonious  State  laws — teaching  them  that, 
while  they  are  a nation  in  their  temper  and  their  interests,  they 
are  legally  a nation  only  outside  their  own  country,  but  at  home 
are  subject  to  the  government  of  States  foreign  and  in  many 
ways  hostile  to  each  other. 

The  full  comprehension  by  the  people  of  the  incongruities 
of  our  present  methods  of  government  by  States  will  be  surely 
followed  by  an  imperative  demand  for  redress,  and  by  the  en- 
forcement of  some  remedy ; whether  the  remedy  adopted  shall 
proceed  from  the  voluntary  action  of  the  States  yielding  to  the 
national  demand,  or  be  found  in  the  simpler  tho  revolutionary 
processes  of  federal  centralization,  is  a question  the  future  only 
can  determine.  But  on  the  solution  of  that  question  turns  the 
continuance  or  the  downfall  of  the  constitutional  system  of  gov- 
ernment inherited  from  the  founders  of  the  republic. 


Eugene  Smith. 


THE  PLACE  OF  PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGI- 
CAL CURRICULUM. 


IT  is  natural  that  one  should  look  with  an  eye  of  favoritism 
upon  his  own  department  of  study,  and,  in  answer  to  the 
inquiry  as  to  what  topics  are  of  most  importance  in  current 
religious  thought,  that  he  should  contrive  to  get  his  own  sub- 
ject pretty  high  up  on  the  list.  For  this  reason  it  is  generally 
safe  to  deduct  something  from  the  strong  statements  which 
are  so  frequently  made  by  enthusiastic  specialists  respecting 
the  burning  questions  in  theological  controversy.  And  yet 
when  we  take  into  account  the  immense  literature  that  is  being 
produced  in  reference  to  the  philosophy  of  religion,  as  well  as 
the  organization  of  societies  in  the  interest  of  the  Christian 
evidences  and  the  endowment  of  chairs  of  apologetics  in  our 
theological  seminaries,  it  can  hardly  be  doubted  that  the  bor- 
der-land of  science,  philosophy,  and  religion  is,  and  is  likely  to 
be  for  many  a day  to  come,  the  arena  of  great  and  growing  in- 
tellectual interest  and  activity.  It  is  not  a sign  of  the  highest 
religious  condition  for  the  church  to  be  expending  so  much  of 
her  energy  in  the  work  of  defending  her  supernatural  claims, 
and  for  inquiries  from  within  her  communion  to  be  made  on 
every  hand  respecting  the  value  of  her  credentials.  It  is  never- 
theless a fact  that  the  present  is  an  apologetic  age,  and  that  the 
apologetic  method  and  spirit  are  visibly  affecting  all  forms  of 
the  church’s  life.  And  while  it  would  certainly  be  better  if 
truth  were  not  challenged,  it  can  hardly  be  denied  that  being 
challenged  it  ought  to  be  defended ; and  it  ought  not  t'o  be 
necessary  at  this  late  day  to  vindicate  the  wisdom  of  the  church 


104 


TI1E  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


in  giving  apologetics  a prominent  place  in  theological  disci- 
pline. The  question  should  rather  be  whether  under  the  pro- 
visions of  this  department  all  the  work  that  is  necessary  for 
the  vindication  of  Christianity  can  be  done.  For  the  area  of 
apologetic  is  far  wider  than  many  suppose ; and  it  may  well  be 
asked  whether  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  exceptional 
qualifications  that  are  needed  for  dealing  with  the  difficulties 
raised  in  Old  Testament  and  New  Testament  historical  criticism, 
to  say  nothing  of  those  which  come  from  the  side  of  physical 
science  and  speculative  philosophy,  are  to  be  looked  for  in  any 
one  mind.  The  question  arises  then  whether  it  will  not  be  nec- 
essary to  carry  the  principle  of  division  of  labor  a step  farther  by 
entrusting  the  historical  and  the  speculative  sides  of  apologetic 
to  different  hands.  And  if  this  were  contemplated,  as  sooner 
or  later  perhaps  it  will  be,  it  should  then  be  considered  whether 
this  end  could  not  be  best  effected  by  establishing  a department 
which  should  proceed  by  a method  slightly  different  from  that 
which  is  commonly  recognized  as  belonging  to  apologetic 
proper.  And  inasmuch  as  there  is  a proper  place  for  philoso- 
phy in  theology,  and,  moreover,  the  attacks  upon  the  Christian 
religion  are  to  a large  extent  on  the  outgrowth  of  philosophical 
principles,  it  may  be  fairly  asked  whether  fidelity  to  truth  does 
not  demand  that,  as  a protection  against  the  evil  consequences 
in  all  branches  of  theology  of  a false  philosophy,  we  should 
give  a recognized  place  to  philosophy  in  the  theological  curricu- 
lum. It  is  a matter  of  minor  importance  how  such  a chair 
should  be  designated.  It  may  be  called  the  chair  of  the  rela- 
tions of  science,  philosophy,  and  religion  ; or  simply  the  chair 
of  religious  philosophy.  In  either  case  it  would  be  easy  to  an- 
ticipate what  class  of  subjects  would  properly  pertain  to  it;  and 
it  would  be  apparent  at  once  that,  while  making  use  of  materials 
that  are  common  to  dogmatics,  ethics,  and  apologetics,  the  pro- 
fessor in  this  department  would  proceed  under  an  organizing 
principle  different  from  those  which  determine  the  departments 
that  have  just  been  named. 

To  some  it  would  seem  that,  as  the  apologete  is  the  pro- 
fessed advocate  of  Christianity,  the  occupant  of  a chair  like  the 
one  of  which  I am  speaking  might  very  properly  act  in  the  ca- 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  105 

parity  of  a judge.  Accordingly  he  might  be  expected  to  enter 
upon  his  duties  with  no  foregone  conclusions,  and  to  divest 
himself  of  all  dogmatic  bias  in  order  that  he  might  act  with 
scrupulous  fairness  toward  the  contending  parties  in  a protracted 
litigation.  But  this  view  of  the  matter  results  from*  a miscon- 
ception of  the  relations  of  dogmatic  faith  to  free  inquiry,  and  a 
forgetfulness  of  the  relations  which  nearly  all  theological  semi- 
naries sustain  to  definite  confessional  theology.  It  cannot  be 
said  that  the  condition  of  fair  investigation  is  antecedent  and 
universal  scepticism.  A man  should  be  ready  to  see  evidence 
that  contradicts  his  own  opinions.  But  it  is  not  necessary  that 
he  should  begin  investigation  without  opinions.  The  scientific 
man  even  is  not  asked  to  be  such  a thorough-going  Cartesian  in 
his  method  as  to  give  up  every  belief  as  the  condition  of  pros- 
ecuting with  fairness  a new  subject  of  investigation ; and  the 
theologian  should  have  as  much  liberty  in  this  respect  as  the 
man  of  science.  If,  therefore,  he  may  enter  upon  his  work  in 
possession  of  distinct  and  definite  opinions,  there  is  no  reason 
why  he  should  not  enter  upon  it  believing  in  a complete  system 
of  theology ; in  other  words,  there  is  no  reason  why  his  avowal 
of  belief  in  a distinct  type  of  confessional  theology  should  hin- 
der his  quest  of  truth  or  prevent  him  from  recognizing  evidence 
whenever  he  sees  it.  The  fact,  therefore,  that  our  theological 
seminaries  are  founded,  as  a rule,  in  the  interests  of  the  doc- 
trine and  polity  of  the  communions  which  they  respectively 
represent,  and  therefore  that  professors  in  those  seminaries 
enter  upon  their  work  with  foregone  conclusions,  is  the  occasion 
of  no  real  difficulty.  For  a man  should  have  made  up  his  mind 
as  to  the  place  of  Christianity  in  the  world  before  taking  the 
position  of  a teacher  in  a school  of  divinity,  and  he  can  honestly 
hold  his  place  in  an  ecclesiastical  organization  only  so  long  as 
he  is  in  sympathy  with  the  ends  for  which  the  organization 
exists.  Assuming  then  that  the  professor  of  the  department 
to  which  reference  is  made  comes  to  his  work  under  the  assump- 
tions of  a confessional  theology,  the  work  before  him  is  one  of 
great  amplitude.  It  will  not  be  necessary  for  him  to  construe 
the  title  of  his  chair  in  the  terms  of  a minimism  of  theology, 
and  it  would  be  quite  correct  to  say  that  the  whole  area  of  dog- 


io6 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


matic,  so  far  as  it  impinges  upon  philosophy  and  science,  is 
legitimately  within  his  domain. 

And  this  dogmatic  attitude,  as  has  been  already  said,  is  not 
incompatible  with  the  exhibition  of  a philosophic  spirit.  The 
incumbent  of  this  as  of  every  chair  should  be  expected  to  deal 
fairly  with  adversaries  ; to  look  difficulties  in  the  face  ; to  make 
honest  concessions  when  they  are  needed ; to  argue  without 
animus ; and  to  see  both  sides  of  all  questions.  No  good  can 
come  through  calling  hard  names.  It  is  argument  that  tells, 
not  indignation.  These  are  not  days  of  otiose  acquiescence  in 
the  doctrines  of  the  church.  This  must  be  recognized.  We 
cannot  compel  belief  nor  punish  doubt.  We  cannot  shut  up 
our  libraries  nor  suppress  investigation.  It  is  useless  to  veto 
thought  or  write  an  Index  expurgatorius.  Fairness,  patience,  a 
judicial  temper,  trust  in  God  and  reverence  for  his  Word — these 
are  the  qualities  that  should  be  conspicuous  in  the  teacher  of 
to-day.  And  when  all  is  done,  it  is  not  to  his  discredit  to  con- 
fess that  his  case  is  stronger  than  the  best  defence  of  it  can  be, 
and  that  the  true  “ grammar  of  assent”  is  learned  by  the  child 
of  God  in  the  school  of  Christ  and  under  the  teaching  of  the 
Holy  Ghost. 

This  is  said,  however,  without  any  sympathy  with  some 
current  opinions  respecting  the  argumentative  status  of  Chris- 
tianity. Indeed,  one  of  the  important  functions  of  a professor- 
ship like  the  one  under  discussion  would  be  to  show  the  defen- 
sible character  of  the  Christian  religion.  For  it  is  of  little 
avail  for  the  dogmatician  to  present  the  arguments  in  support 
of  his  beliefs,  or  for  the  apologete  to  marshal  the  Christian  evi- 
dences, if  by  the  decision  of  an  antecedent  question  the  system 
of  revealed  religion  is  taken  out  of  the  range  of  argument  alto- 
gether. The  defences  of  Christianity  are  valuable,  but  a defence 
of  the  defences  is  needed  too.  It  is  a questionable  service 
which  is  rendered  the  cause  of  truth  when  one  form  of  evidence 
is  magnified  at  the  expense  of  another,  and  I have  no  confi- 
dence in  the  philosophy  that  first  throws  the  intellect  into  bank- 
ruptcy and  then  pensions  us  on  an  allowance  of  faith.  If  God 
exists,  I wish  to  know  the  reasons  for  believing  in  his  existence  ; 
and  when  I am  told  that  I must  be  satisfied  to  believe  without 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  IC>7 

reasons,  I simply  repudiate  the  suggestion.  If  Christianity  is 
a divinely  revealed  religion,  there  should  be  evidence  that  will 
accredit  it ; and  when  I am  told  that  it  cannot  be  proved  true, 
but  that  it  accredits  itself  to  the  religious  consciousness,  all  I have 
to  say  is  that  I have  a poor  opinion  both  of  the  piety  and  the 
logic  that  shuts  me  up  to  any  such  conclusion.  We  know  how 
Sir  William  Hamilton  undertook  to  aid  faith  by  destroying 
knowledge  ; and  we  know  too  how  he  was  met — by  no  one  with 
more  power  of  logic  and  more  clearness  of  thought  than  by 
Dr.  Charles  Hodge,  whose- famous  chapter  on  the  knowledge  of 
God  stands  as  a magnificent  parenthesis  in  the  progress  of  his 
theistic  argument.  The  division  of  thought  that  followed  the 
publication  of  the  doctrine  of  the  conditioned  is  full  of  instruc- 
tion, and  should  serve  as  a warning.  Mansel  thought  he  saw  in 
it  the  basis  of  a new  defence  of  Christianity;  and  Spencer 
pressed  it  into  the  service  of  agnosticism.  The  general  opinion 
is  that  while  Mansel’s  was  the  better  cause,  Spencer’s  was  the 
better  served.  So  true  indeed  is  the  remark  of  Hume’s  most 
able  critic,  that  “ when  the  most  pious  philosophical  purpose 
expresses  itself  in  a doctrine  resting  on  an  inadequate  philo- 
sophical principle,  it  is  the  principle  and  not  the  purpose  that 
will  regulate  the  permanent  effect  of  the  doctrine”  (Green  : In- 
troduction to  Hume,  p.  133).  We  are  likely  to  have  another 
illustration  of  this  truth  in  the  discussions  that  are  now  before 
the  church. 

It  is  no  new  thing  to  be  told  that  we  cannot  favor  the  canon- 
icity  and  inspiration  of  the  Scriptures,  and  that  historical  testi- 
mony cannot  take  us  beyond  probability.  Roman  Catholic 
theologians  have  urged  before  to-day,  and  for  the  sake  of  shut- 
ting us  up  to  the  infallibility  of  the  church,  what  Protestant 
theologians  are  urging  at  this  moment,  and  for  the  sake  of 
shutting  us  up  to  the  infallibility  of  a personal  judgment  which 
they  call  the  witness  of  the  Spirit.  The  method  employed  has 
the  merit  of  appearing  to  honor  the  Spirit,  and  on  this  account 
will  commend  itself  to  many  minds.  On  this  account,  too,  Dpd- 
well’s  “Christianity  not  Founded  on  Argument”  was  at  first  re- 
garded with  favor.  But  it  turned  out  that  Dodwell’s  book  was 
written  in  the  interest  of  scepticism,  and  the  subjectivism  that 


io8 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


is  current,  tho  not  chargeable  with  any  sinister  intent,  will, 
unless  I greatly  err,  prove  itself  a most  disastrous  concession  to 
the  enemy.  To  fall  back  upon  faith  in  the  thick  of  a great 
conflict  is  to  confess  defeat.  To  declare  that  truths  which  are 
not  intuitions  are  at  the  same  time  incapable  of  defence  save 
by  subjective  tests  is  practically  to  retire  from  controversy  and 
leave  the  questions  of  debate  to  be  settled  by  the  quiet  opera- 
tion of  the  Spirit  of  God.  Some  would  call  this  wise.  To  in- 
voke any  argument  seems  to  such  men  like  leaning  on  an  arm 
of  flesh ; and  the  attempt  to  show  that  what  we  believe  is  be- 
lieved for  reasons  that  can  be  mediated  to  the  understanding 
of  thinking  men  is  considered  by  them  as  an  unholy  alliance 
between  philosophy  and  theology.  It  seems  to  be  forgotten  by 
such  men  that  while  the  witness  of  the  Spirit  is  the  ground  of 
indefectible  certitude  to  the  individual,  it  is  hard,  if  it  is  not 
impossible,  to  make  our  personal  certitude  the  basis  of  argu- 
ment with  others.  It  is  forgotten  that  the  strongest  reasons 
for  our  own  convictions  are  not  always  those  of  which  we  can 
make  the  most  use  when  dealing  with  other  minds ; and  there- 
fore, so  far  from  there  being  any  incompatibility  between  ob- 
jective evidence  and  subjective  impressions  originated  by  the 
Spirit,  the  one  is  the  proper  complement  of  the  other.  But  it 
is  difficult  apparently  for  some  to  realize  that  fair  debate  be- 
tween believers  and  unbelievers  must  proceed  upon  the  basis  of 
common  intellectual  conditions  and  common  objective  evidence. 
To  support  a position  by  a subjectivity  peculiar  to  one  party  in 
the  discussion,  and  especially  by  a subjectivity  that  begs  the 
whole  question  in  dispute,  or  to  urge  a historic  bias  as  an  argu- 
mentative make-weight,  is  simply  to  argue  unfairly.  In  a cer- 
tain sense  Protestantism  is  individualism.  It  affirms  the  right 
of  every  man  to  read  and  think  for  himself,  and  therefore  it 
affirms  his  right  to  very  considerate  treatment  in. debate.  For 
himself  and  in  foro  conscientice  the  individual  Christian  may 
decide  and  does  decide,  in  addition  to  external  evidence,  by 
the  witness  of  the  Spirit ; but  when  he  appears  in  debate  and 
aims  at  convincing  another  mind,  he  must  make  use  of  the 
canons  of  certitude  that  other  men  employ.  He  may  believe 
that  the  Holy  Ghost  has  borne  witness  to  truth  in  the  historic 


« 

PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  IO9 

life  of  the  church  ; but  with  the  unbeliever  this  argument  will  be 
of  little  avail : and  with  the  believer  even  it  must  be  used  care- 
fully, or  else  under  the  guise  of  a corporate  Christian  conscious- 
ness we  may  bring  back  into  the  bosom  of  Protestantism  the 
doctrine  of  corporate  infallibility,  which  was  discarded  at  the 
Reformation. 

Nothing,  however,  is  here  intended  that  would  disparage  the 
doctrine  that  the  Holy  Spirit  bears  witness  to  the  Truth.  God 
undoubtedly  will  take  care  of  his  church.  The  Bible  certainly 
carries  on  its  face  the  marks  of  its  intrinsic  majesty  and  divinity. 
The  Holy  Ghost  is  the  great  Apologete.  The  increasing  army 
of  Christian  men  is  the  great  bulwark  of  the  church  against  the 
encroachments  of  infidelity.  But  it  is  true  nevertheless  that 
Christianity  can  be  defended,  and  ought  to  be  defended,  by 
argument ; and  instead  of  sympathizing  with  the  cavalier  treat- 
ment of  the  older  apologists,  which  is  so  common,  I believe  that 
Principal  Cairns  gave  utterance  to  golden  words  when  he  said 
that  “ Christianity  is  not  promoted  by  changing  either  its  type 
of  doctrine  or  its  style  of  evidence”  (Unbelief  in  the  Eight- 
eenth Century,  p.  279).  Argument  is  not  unavailing.  It 
was  useful  in  the  deistic  battle  of  last  century ; it  is  needed 
in  the  theistic  battle  of  this.  The  church  is  not  wasting  her 
resources  when  she  equips  her  seminaries ; when  she  endows 
her  professorships  of  divinity  and  her  lectureships  in  apolo- 
getics. 

There  is  a power  even  in  her  commanding  attitude  which 
sometimes  even  her  enemies  will  admit.  “You  cannot  talk  of 
ignoring  St.  Paul’s  Cathedral,”  says  Mr.  Bradlaugh ; “ it  is  too 
high.”  Let  the  church  so  present  the  claims  of  the  Gospel  as 
to  extort  concessions  like  this  and  make  men  say,  We  cannot 
ignore  the  Gospel.  We  cannot  ignore  its  arguments.  We  can- 
not ignore  the  cathedral  of  Christian  doctrine.  It  is  too  high. 
Its  solid  walls,  its  stately  towers,  its  storied  windows,  its  shining 
pinnacles  arrest  attention  and  command  the  admiration  of  the 
world.  This,  however,  imposes  upon  us  great  responsibilities. 
We  must  defend,  but  we  must  have  a theory  of  defence.  We 
must  argue,  but  we  must  have  an  organon.  We  cannot  postu- 
late ultimates  and  put  an  easy  end  to  controversy.  We  must 


I IO 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


be  prepared  to  follow  when  the  discussion  leads,  as  lead  it 
assuredly  will,  to  fundamental  questions  in  the  philosophy  of 
belief. 

Of  course  there  is  a sense  in  which  it  is  wrong  to  approach, 
the  Bible  with  foregone  conclusions.  It  is  not  a treasury  whence 
men  may  cull  appropriate  mottoes  for  the  garniture  of  their  own 
excogitations  ; nor  have  they  any  right  first  to  think  out  a doc- 
trine and  then,  as  the  manner  of  some  has  been,  prove  that  the 
Word  of  God  agrees  with  it.  The  old  method  of  rationalistic 
dogmatism  is  of  course  to  be  rejected.  Yet  there  is,  neverthe- 
less, a place  in  theology  for  human  thought.  There  is  a phi- 
losophy of  defence.  There  is  also  a philosophy  of  organization. 
The  results  of  study  are  to  be  classified,  and  as  there  is  no  in- 
spired system  of  classification  the  principles  that  are  employed 
in  other  inquiries  must  be  turned  to  account.  Moreover,  tho 
each  doctrine  of  our  faith  is  supported  by  its  own  array  of  proof- 
texts,  and  may  be  separately  proved  by  induction,  it  is  equally 
true  that  while  the  laws  of  thought  remain  as  they  are  it  will 
be  impossible  to  avoid  the  deductive  process  which,  when  one 
proposition  is  given,  leads  through  the  mediation  of  a second  to 
its  inferential  relations  to  a third  doctrinal  statement.  And  as 
it  is  impossible  to  receive  contradictory  statements  as  true,  so 
it  is  impossible  to  avoid  the  attempt  to  organize  by  deductive 
logic  the  separate  doctrinal  inductions.  In  other  words,  if  we 
think,  we  must  think  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  thinking, 
whatever  the  subject  of  our  thinking  may  be.  We  may  organize 
the  teachings  of  the  Bible  after  a genetic  method  and  under 
the  category  of  time ; or  we  may  regard  the  doctrines  as  co- 
existing members  of  a great  doctrinal  system.  And  for  the 
sake  of  distinguishing  these  methods,  we  may  call  the  one  Bib- 
lical, and  the  other  systematic,  theology ; but  the  latter  is  as 
Biblical  as  the  former,  and  the  former  is  not  less  philosophical 
than  the  latter.  In  both  cases  logic  gives  the  form  and  Scripture 
furnishes  the  matter.  And  when  it  is  borne  in  mind  that  tho 
logic  may  change  relations  it  cannot  invent  facts,  it  will  appear 
that  a Christocentric  method  in  dogmatic,  excellent  as  that 
method  is,  can  of  itself  make  no  change  in  our  dogmatic  sys- 
tem. No  doctrine  can  be  added-;  none  can  be  obliterated ; no 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  Ill 


change  in  the  statement  of  doctrine  can  take  place  as  the  result 
of  transposing  the  several  dogmatic  units  and  changing  their 
relations  in  space.  So  far  as  doctrine  is  unaffected  by  order, 
changing  the  order  is  a harmless  thing;  and  so  far  as  doctrine 
conditions  order,  the  doctrine  must  he  abandoned  or  modified 
before  the  order  can  be  changed. 

This  seems  so  clear  that  I cannot  avoid  the  impression  that 
behind  the  purely  logical  question  respecting  the  order  of  prece- 
dence in  which  doctrines  should  be  presented  there  is  an  organ- 
izing principle  which  determines  it ; and  that  organizing  prin- 
ciple may  involve  a very  serious  modification  not  of  the  dog- 
matic method,  but  of  the  matter  of  dogmatic  as  well.  Both 
Roman  Catholic  and  Protestant  theologians  have  been  moving 
away,  as  Rabiger  shows  (Theologik,  s.  157),  from  the  positions 
occupied  in  the  Reformation  period.  In  both  communions 
there  has  been  a strong  tendency  to  find  authority  for  speaking 
in  the  present  tense  instead  of  appealing  to  tradition  or  the 
letter  of  Scripture.  Rome  has  found  her  organizing  principle  in 
the  perpetual  miracle  of  papal  infallibility,  while  the  tendency 
in  Protestantism  is  to  find  it  in  the  infallibility  of  the  religious 
consciousness.  And  whether  this  corporate  and  subjective 
infallibility  be  formulated  in  the  terms  of  freedom  or  depend- 
ence, whether  it  be  through  the  speculative  intellect  or  the 
religious  consciousness  that  the  attempt  is  made  to  centre  the- 
ology in  the  historic  life  instead  of  in  the  record  of  that  life,  the 
effect  is  just  the  same  : dogmatic  theology  ceases  to  be  a fixed 
body  of  truth  to  be  ascertained  by  exegesis. 

It  becomes  a historic  life  finding  its  highest  expression  in  the 
Incarnate  Logos,  but  manifesting  itself  in  the  Christian  con- 
sciousness of  the  church,  the  interpretation  of  which  is  the  chief 
function  of  dogmatic,  as  a branch  of  theological  discipline.  It 
is  only  by  some  such  interpretation  as  this  that  I can  understand 
the  distinctions  which  speak  of  orthodoxy  and  orthodoxism,  the 
schemes  of  dogmatic  reconstruction,  and  the  frequent  assertion 
that  every  age  must  have  its  own  theology. 

An  author’s  place  in  the  great  family  of  dogmaticians  must 
sometimes  be  understood  before  we  can  set  a proper  value  upon 
his  words.  For  there  is  a great  difference  between  the  dogmatic 


1 12 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  W. 


of  ecclesiastical  tradition,  the  dogmatic  of  papal  infallibility,  the 
dogmatic  of  the  religious  feeling,  the  dogmatic  of  the  specula- 
tive intellect,  and  the  dogmatic  of  Biblical  exegesis.  And  as 
foregone  conclusions  will  shape  the  place  of  doctrines  in  a dog- 
matic system,  so  also  will  they  determine  the  place  of  dogmatic 
itself  in  the  system  of  theological  discipline.  And  in  view  of  the 
rapid  multiplication  of  theological  essays,  it  is  of  great  practical 
importance  that  theological  students  should  have  a scientific 
knowledge  of  theological  encyclopaedia,  by  which  is  meant  not 
merely  an  ingenious  distribution  of  the  departments  of  theo- 
logical study,  but  a scientific  exhibition  of  the  principles  that 
have  controlled,  as  well  as  those  which  should  control,  theologi- 
cal method.  For  men  are  giving  us  their  conclusions  without 
their  premises.  They  are  giving  expression  to  taking  words 
regarding  Christian  dogma  which  those  who  are  filled  with  the 
enthusiasm  of  new  thoughts  are  trying  to  harmonize  with  the 
old  theology.  They  will  find  that  they  cannot  add  the  new 
cloth  to  the  old  garment.  They  will  find  that  statements  which 
impressed  them  at  first  so  favorably,  and  carried  on  their  face 
such  professions  of  devotion  to  Jesus,  require  a far  more  sweep- 
ing reconstruction  of  their  theology  than  they  dreamed  of.  It 
is  very  important  at  this  moment  that  the  doctrinal  affinities  of 
some  of  these  new  things  that  are  brought  to  our  ears  should 
be  made  plain.  For  if,  as  Prof.  Ferrier  has  so  brilliantly  shown, 
“ the  only  light  of  any  truth  is  its  contrasting  error,”  it  is  also 
true  that  in  order  that  error  should  be  recognized  as  such  it 
must  be  seen  in  its  relations  to  the  system  of  which  it  forms  a 
part.  There  is  a clear  and  fundamental  distinction  between  the 
dogmatic  and  the  apologetic  attitude.  It  is  a mistake  to  say 
that  the  Christian  religion  as  a supernatural  and  revealed  system 
is  incapable  of  defence  save  on  the  basis  of  an  inspired  and  infal- 
lible Bible,  true  and  important  as  the  doctrine  of  inspiration  is. 
But  it  is  a far  greater  mistake  to  carry  the  method  of  apologetic 
into  dogmatic  theology  and  say : “ Because  this  is  all  that  is 
needed  for  the  defence  of  a supernatural  theology,  this,  there- 
fore, is  all  that  is  of  value  in  belief.”  This  is  to  make  the  mini- 
mum of  apologetic,  the  maximum  of  dogmatic.  And  this  is  the 
evil  tendency  of  the  hour. 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  1 1 3 


There  is  close  affinity  between  the  speculative  thought  and 
the  religious  life  of  a people.  The  influence  of  a dominant  phi- 
losophy shows  itself  in  theology.  Aristotelianism,  Cartesianism, 
Kantianism,  Hegelianism,  and  now  positivism,  have  been  in 
succession  the  philosophic  forces  in  theology.  In  this  land  the 
influence  of  speculation  on  dogma  has  been  conspicuous.  To 
write  the  history  of  the  theology  of  New  England  is  to  write 
the  history  of  its  philosophy.  Its  philosophic  interest  was  de- 
veloped out  of  theological  exigencies  ; its  theological  discussions 
have  flowed  in  the  channels  of  philosophical  speculation.  And 
with  the  memory  of  the  evils  that  have  followed  the  intrusion  of 
philosophy  into  theology  before  their  minds,  it  is  not  strange  that 
men  are  suspicious  of  philosophy.  No  wonder,  when  they  remem- 
ber that  speculation  has  destroyed  the  historic  meaning  of  every 
Scripture  fact ; that  confessional  dogmas  have  been  made  the 
categories  under  which  a pantheistic  philosophy  has  been  rubri- 
cized ; no  wonder,  when  they  think  of  the  dreary  homilies  on  the 
decrees  and  disinterested  benevolence,  that  the  demand  is  heard 
for  a Biblical  theology.  By  all  means  let  the  demand  be  met. 
Let  us  have  Biblical  theology  in  the  technical  sense  of  the  term ; 
and  let  our  dogmatic  theology  continue  to  be  a theology  of 
exegesis  and  not  a theology  of  tradition  and  speculation.  The 
fact,  however,  still  remains  that  philosophy  and  theology  have 
uniformly  sustained  very  close  relations  to  each  other;  and  the 
history  of  these  relations  will  teach  some  important  lessons. 
It  will  show  that  the  philosophy  of  the  college  insensibly 
affects  the  theology  of  the  seminary ; that  to  shape  the  phi- 
losophy of  a people  is  to  shape  its  jurisprudence,  its  ethics, 
its  theology,  the  ministrations  of  the  pulpit,  the  teaching  of 
the  Sabbath-school,  and  even  the  fireside  instruction  of  the 
home.  It  will  show  that  between  these  great  departments 
there  is  an  intimacy  that  ecclesiastical  authority  can  neither 
interrupt  nor  control.  The  pope  may  relegate  us  to  Aquinas, 
and  Father  Harper  may  write  even  more  interestingly  still 
concerning  the  philosophy  of  the  school,  but  whether  Aquinas 
or  Spinoza  will  be  the  master-metaphysician  of  the  next  genera- 
tion is  something  that  lies  beyond  ecclesiastical  control.  It  will 
show  us,  too,  that  while  a priori  speculation  has  done  injury 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


1 14 

to  truth,  there  is  nevertheless  a place,  if  not  for  it,  at  least  for 
metaphysic  in  theology.  In  order  to  exhibit  the  proper  rela- 
tions of  theology  and  philosophy,  one  must  perform  a double 
duty.  Speaking  in  behalf  of  theology,  there  is  a long  history  of 
invasion  to  be  recited,  conquered  territory  to  be  reclaimed,  and 
the  right  of  theology  to  the  unmolested  enjoyment  of  her  God- 
given  domain  to  be  insisted  on  and  defended.  Speaking,  on  the 
other  hand,  in  behalf  of  philosophy,  it  will  be  his  duty  to  show 
the  real  service  that  she  may  render  Christian  truth,  and,  guard- 
ing against  the  impression  that  her  former  faults  are  to  be  pun- 
ished with  perpetual  banishment  or  penal  servitude,  to  say  in 
the  words  of  the  reformed  theologian  Mursinna : Philosophia  non 
est  ancilla  scd potius  soror  theologies. 

The  word  philosophy  is  used,  however,  in  a somewhat  broader 
sense  than  that  of  a priori  speculation,  and,  in  antithesis  to  the- 
ology, to  mean  the  method  that  reaches  truth  through  inference 
and  argument,  as  opposed  to  that  which  receives  it  by  direct 
divine  revelations.  In  a broad  sense,  then,  we  say  that  Christian 
theology  is  a matter  of  revelation  and  not  of  philosophy.  And 
yet  our  system  of  theology  begins  with  a theistic  conception  of 
the  universe.  There  are  a few  who  would  say  with  Watson  that 
we  owe  our  knowledge  of  God  to  the  Bible,  and  who  would 
therefore  depreciate  the  theistic  proofs  ; for  there  are  some  men 
who  always  imagine  that  it  is  a mark  of  special  respect  for  the 
Bible  to  teach  that  we  can  have  no  knowledge  of  God  without  it. 

But  men  honor  the  Bible  most  when  they  believe  what  it  says; 
and  therefore  believe  that  the  heavens  declare  the  glory  of  God, 
and  the  firmament  showeth  his  handiwork.  There  are  few  who 
would  wish  to  see  the  teleological  and  the  moral  arguments  for 
God’s  existence  taken  out  of  the  books  of  systematic  theology. 
Yet  these  arguments  are  not  Biblical.  They  are  as  truly  philo- 
sophical as  are  the  arguments  that  support  any  scientific  hypoth- 
esis. Here,  then,  we  have  a reasoned  theism — a theory  of  the 
universe  which,  however  it  originated,  is  at  least  defended  by  the 
application  of  the  laws  of  thought  to  the  facts  of  the  external 
world.  We  have  an  inferential  as  opposed  to  an  informational 
knowledge  of  God ; and  to  this  extent  we  have  a philosophical 
factor  in  our  theological  system. 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  1 1 5 


There  is,  then,  an  empirical  and  philosophical  element  in  the- 
ology,  at  least  in  so  far  as  theology  makes  use  of  argument  in 
support  of  the  belief  in  God;  for  just  so  far  as  theology  finds 
an  argument  for  the  existence  of  God  in  the  facts  of  nature 
does  it  give  an  interpretation  to  the  facts  of  nature. 

Reasoned  theism  has  a subjective  and  an  objective  side — a 
side  that  relates  it  to  philosophy  and  one  that  relates  it  to  sci- 
ence. This  would  naturally  be  the  place,  therefore,  to  speak 
of  the  relations  of  science,  philosophy,  and  religion.  And  if  I 
sympathized  with  many  who  are  so  fond  of  referring  to  what 
they  call  the  “ conflict  ” of  science  and  religion,  I should  at  this 
point  indicate  that  the  work  of  a professor  in  the  department  re- 
ferred to  in  this  article  would  consist  very  largely  in  the  attempt 
to  establish  amicable  relations  between  the  three  great  powers 
that  have  been  named.  But  it  must  have  already  appeared  that 
the  work  pertaining  to  a chair  of  religious  philosophy  has  a far 
wider  scope  than  that  of  drafting  treaties  of  peace  between  person- 
alized abstractions ; and  it  ought  not  to  be  a very  difficult  thing 
to  understand  the  reasons  for  those  differences  of  opinion  on 
religio-scientific  subjects  which  have  given  rise  to  what  has  come 
to  be  known  as  “ conflict-literature.”  Having  two  accounts 
of  the  same  phenomena,  one  empirical  and  the  other  revealed, 
it  is  easy  to  see  that  through  misunderstanding  of  Scripture  or 
premature  generalization  in  science  there  may  be  an  apparent 
discrepancy  between  them.  It  will  be  pretty  generally  agreed, 
I think,  that  in  so  far  as  science  deals  with  facts  in  the  phenome- 
nal world  false  theories  must  be  left  to  the  slow  dialectic  of 
time,  or  be  dealt  with  by  men  who  have  a right  to  speak  with 
the  authority  of  specialists  in  the  several  departments  of  scien- 
tific investigation.  And  it  is  just  as  clearly  recognized  that  be- 
tween the  facts  of  science  and  the  metaphysical  inferences  that 
are  based  upon  them  the  difference  is  very  wide. 

The  student  of  science  who  is  aware  of  the  unreached  heights 
and  the  unfathomed  depths  of  his  special  department  may  fvell 
resent  the  patronizing  tone  of  omniscience  with  which  the  theo- 
logian sometimes  speaks  of  the  facts  of  nature.  But  the  modest 
student  of  nature  is  also  well  aware  that  when  he  goes  into 
the  arena  of  metaphysic  he  is  occupying  a position  where  his 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IK 


1 16 

knowledge  of  phenomena  gives  him  no  exceptional  advantage. 
It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  the  great  questions  of  debate 
between  science  and  religion  transcend  the  sphere  of  the  em- 
pirical, and  that  the  great  differences  of  opinions  on  religious 
questions  are  those  which  lie  at  the  roots  of  our  intellectual  life. 
A sound  metaphysic  is  therefore  the  presupposition  and  postu- 
late of  theology  as  it  is  the  presupposition  and  postulate  of  sci- 
ence itself.  We  are  debtors  alike  to  science  and  philosophy, 
and  we  can  as  little  afford  to  spare  one  as  the  other  from  our 
theological  curriculum. 

The  word  Philosophy  is  used  in  this  article  with  a great  deal 
of  latitude,  it  must  be  confessed,  yet  with  a latitude  justified  by 
very  good  usage.  It  is  used  as  the  synonym  of  logic.  It  is  used 
to  signify  a method  so  that  the  exhibition  of  a system  accord- 
ing to  its  organizing  principle  would  be  the  philosophy  of  the 
system.  It  is  used  to  indicate  a priori  or  speculative  reasoning, 
and  is  applied  specially  to  systems  of  thought  that  follow  the  de- 
ductive rather  than  the  inductive  method.  It  is  employed  as  the 
antithesis  of  revelation,  and  refers  to  any  mode  of  reaching  truth 
aside  from  the  interpretation  of  Scripture. 

It  is  sometimes  the  same  as  psychology,  tho  in  the  stricter 
application  of  the  word  it  is  metaphysic ; that  is,  as  Shadworth 
Hodgson  says,  it  is,  “the  ultimate  subjective  analysis  of  motions 
which  to  science  are  themselves  ultimate”  (“  Philosophy  of  Re- 
flection,” vol.  i.  p.  45).  In  all  these  senses  of  the  word  phi- 
losophy, rightly  or  wrongly,  has  had  and  has  to-day  a place  in 
theology. 

And  there  is  yet  another  sense  in  which  the  word  Philosophy 
is  used.  For  as  it  describes  the  primary,  so  it  expresses  the 
final  stage  of  knowledge.  It  is  the  name  which  men  give  to 
their  work  when  they  undertake  to  articulate  the  facts  of  the 
phenomenal  world  under  some  all-comprehensive  generalization. 
And  so  we  have  the  philosophy  of  Hegel  and  the  philosophy  of 
Comte.  Nor  have  we  a right  to  complain  because  such  ambi- 
tious attempts  are  made  ; for  some  generalization  there  undoubt- 
edly is  that  will  express  the  totality  of  truth  ; or  in  other  words, 
there  is  some  explanation  of  the  universe; — tho  we  make 
bold  to  say  that  any  philosophy  is  incomplete  which  does  not 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  1 1 7 


recognize  that  the  Almighty  has  left  his  footprints  in  this  world 
of  things,  and  that  the  Lord  of  Glory  has  taken  his  place  in  the 
sequences  and  successions  of  human  history.  Call  this  final 
statement  what  we  please,  science,  philosophy,  theology,  it  must 
proceed  under  a theistic  conception  of  the  universe  ; it  must  be 
shaped  under  the  category  of  purpose  ; it  must  have  a place  for 
the  Incarnation  ; and  it  must  take  cognizance  of  the  future  of 
the  individual  in  the  life  to  come  as  well  as  of  the  future  of  the 
race  in  the  “ life  that  now  is.” 

But  the  fact  that  the  word  Philosophy  is  used  with  such 
breadth  and  diversity  of  meaning  may  suggest  the  difficulty  of 
defining  its  place  in  a theological  curriculum.  And  a difficulty 
there  may  undoubtedly  be  in  determining  the  precise  scope  of 
such  a department,  wdiether  it  be  known  as  that  of  religious 
philosophy,  or  philosophical  apologetics,  or  the  relations  of 
science,  philosophy,  and  religion.  There  are,  however,  some 
topics  that  call  for  special  discussion,  and  that  belong  more 
properly  to  the  department  of  which  we  are  speaking  than  to 
any  other.  To  the  incumbent  of  a chair  such  as  the  one  under 
consideration  it  would  fall  to  exhibit,  at  least  in  outline,  the 
historic  relations  of  philosophy,  science,  and  theology  ; not  in 
the  form  of  a history  of  doctrine,  nor  yet  in  the  form  of  a history 
of  free  thought;  not  with  the  minuteness  of  Zockler  in  his 
history  of  the  relations  between  theology  and  natural  science, 
nor  yet  after  the  fragmentary  manner  in  which  this  work  has 
been  so  often  attempted.  It  should  embrace  the  age  of  the 
Apologists  and  the  influence  of  scholasticism.  It  should  show 
the  formative  principles  of  the  era  of  the  confessions ; the  effect 
of  the  Cartesian  philosophy ; the  anti-confessional  drift,  which 
has  been  brought  about  by  the  Kantian  and  post-Kantian  phi- 
losophy ; and  lastly,  tho  not  of  least  importance,  it  should  deal 
with  the  special  contributions  to  the  history  of  opinion  which 
have  been  made  in  our  own  land. 

But  in  addition  to  this  historico-critical  work  there  is  an  im- 
portant constructive  work  to  be  done.  And  under  this  head 
the  philosophy  of  belief  will  occupy  a very  conspicuous  place. 
At  the  bottom  of  all  belief  or  disbelief  there  lies  a theory  of 
knowledge  and  belief.  A philosophy  of  sensation  will  lead  to 


1 1 8 


THE  PRIXCE TON  REVIEW. 


atheism,  but  only  because  it  will  lead  to  universal  unbelief. 
The  physicist  has  the  same  interest  as  the  theologian  in  the  con- 
servation of  the  a priori  elements  of  knowledge.  For  a sensa- 
tional philosophy  that  will  leave  us  an  objective  firmament  as 
the  field  of  astronomical  explorations,  and  an  objective  earth  as 
the  arena  of  biological  study,  and  objective  other  seifs  whose 
lucubrations  I can  read  in  the  bimonthlies  and  the  quarterly 
reviews,  but  which  undertakes,  because  it  is  a philosophy  of 
sensation,  to  eliminate  God  from  the  category  of  Being,  is  a 
philosophy  of  unmitigated  absurdity.  It  is  with  such  a philoso- 
phy that  we  have  to  deal.  It  tells  us  that  our  beliefs  in  cause, 
substance,  and  moral  obligation  are  generalized  experiences,  and 
it  is  none  the  less  objectionable  because  through  the  doctrine  of 
evolution  it  seeks  to  mediate  between  the  intuitional  and  the 
associational  theories  of  knowledge  by  telling  us  that  the  same 
idea  may  be  both  an  intuition  and  an  inference — an  intuition 
for  the  individual  and  an  inference  for  the  race.  A great  work 
has  already' been  done  in  defence  of  our  primary  beliefs,  and  Dr. 
McCosh  has  especially  placed  all  the  advocates  of  intuitional 
philosophy  under  lasting  obligation  for  his  elucidation  of  this 
subject.  But  we  have  not  yet  seen  the  end  of  controversy,  and 
it  looks  now  as  tho  the  discussions  of  the  next  generation 
were  to  be  as  important  as  any  that  have  preceded  it.  For  the 
free,  finite,  perdurable,  personal  self  is  the  very  citadel  of  truth. 
We  must  defend  the  a priori  elements  of  knowledge.  We  must 
defend  them  not  as  relatively7  but  as  absolutely7  true.  We  can- 
not hold  an  egoistic  idealism.  We  cannot  take  some  point  of 
vantage  and,  watching  the  phenomenal  world  march  past  in 
grand  review,  exclaim : “ This  after  all  is  only’-  the  phenomenal 
aspect  of  what  I call  my^self.”  We  cannot  hold  a philosophy 
which  to  be  consistent  should  go  on  to  say  that  the  silent  stars 
die  out  whenever  I go  to  sleep  ; and  when  dissolution  comes,  to 
me  comes  then  the  funeral  of  universal  Being.  And  if  instead 
of  making  the  individual  self  we  make  the  universal  self  the 
basis  of  our  philosophy,  we  shall  still  find  that  we  have  made 
evangelical  Christianity  impossible.  And  when  I am  told  that 
along  a purposive  route  and  through  the  stages  of  historic 
growth  rising  on  itself  in  the  ascent  of  life  the  universal  self  has 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  I ig 

struggled  for  expression,  until  in  thinking,  praying  man  it  comes 
to  recognize  itself  ; when  the  individual  self,  the  self  of  analysis, 
reaches  out  unto  and  realizes  the  universal  self,  the  self  of  syn- 
thesis,— it  does  not  save  me  from  the  disastrous  consequences  of 
such  a faith  to  be  reminded,  as  I am  reminded  by  Mr.  Wallace, 
that  this  philosophy  is  a theology  throughout.  It  makes  no 
difference  how  my  personality  is  obliterated,  whether  by  panthe- 
ism or  materialism,  the  effect  is  just  the  same.  And  when  it 
comes  to  the  question  whether  Christian  life  shall  be  strangled 
by  the  python  of  Hegelianism  or  the  python  of  positive  phi- 
losophy there  is  but  little  to  choose. 

A valid  defence  of  Christianity  must  be  a defence  of  knowl- 
edge as  knowledge.  It  is  bad  enough  to  offer  us  an  unauthorized 
faith,  but  it  is  worse  to  give  us  our  choice,  as  Mr.  Balfour  does, 
between  two  inevitable  doubts.  No  service  is  rendered  either 
science  or  religion  by  an  attempt  to  show  that  there  is  no  valid 
reason  for  either,  but  that  we  are  free  to  hold  to  them  through 
what  he  calls  the  “ practical  need  of  both.”  This,  however,  is  a 
large  subject,  and  its  development  would  involve  not  only  the 
discussion  of  fundamental  truth,  but  also  the  processes  of  proof ; 
the  laws  of  evidence ; the  province  of  analogy ; the  influence  of 
authority;  the  ethics  of  belief;  the  distinction  between  probabil- 
ity and  certitude,  and  the  place  of  both  in  religion.  In  short, 
it  would  be  the  logic  of  theology.  Next  in  logical  order  would 
come  the  discussion  of  theism  ; and  we  need  not  say  how  much 
interest  centres  here.  The  constructive  side  of  the  theistic  dis- 
cussion has  lost  none  of  its  importance  in  recent  years ; for  while 
mere  illustrations  of  design  in  nature  cannot  be  said  to  meet 
the  exigencies  of  current  debate,  the  discussion  of  the  teleologi- 
cal principle  is  becoming  more  and  more  important.  And  when 
we  find  men  admitting  the  teleological  principle,  but  denying 
the  theistic  conclusion  to  which  it  logically  leads,  it  is  impossible 
to  avoid  the  feeling  that  their  anti-theistic  utterances  are  after 
all  important  concessions  to  the  theistic  position.  But  anti- 
theistic  literature  abounds  in  these  concessions,  and  when  we 
read  of  Matthew  Arnold’s  “Stream  of  Tendency,”  Spencer’s 
“Unknowable,”  Schopenhauer’s  “World  as  Will,”  and  Hart- 
mann’s elaborate  defence  of  finality  as  the  product  of  uncon- 


120 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


scious  intelligence,  we  may  well  ask  if  the  theists  with  their 
belief  in  one  personal  God  are  not  in  possession  of  the  only 
hypothesis  that  can  save  the  language  of  these  writers  from  the 
charge  of  meaningless  and  idiotic  raving. 

And  it  is  easy  to  see  how  large  an  area  of  polemic  the 
theistic  discussion  involves ; for  not  only  are  objections  to  be 
answered,  but  rival  theories  of  the  universe  are  to  be  examined. 
There  is  the  system  of  pantheism,  which  organizes  the  phenom- 
enal world  under  the  conception  of  God  and  denies  the  sep- 
arate personality  and  freedom  of  finite  minds.  There  is  the 
system  that  does  not  get  outside  of  the  phenomenal  self,  and 
so  finds  its  creed  shrivelling  into  a barren  agnosticism.  And 
there  is,  finally,  a system  that  undertakes  to  articulate  the 
phenomenal  universe  in  the  terms  of  matter,  and  ends  in  giv- 
ing us  not  only  a mechanical  world  without,  but  a mechanical 
mind  within.  It  ends  in  automatism.  It  ends  in  explaining 
the  music  of  Beethoven,  the  painting  of  Raphael,  the  sculp- 
ture of  Thorwaldsen,  and  the  catliedral  monument  of  Sir  Chris- 
topher Wren  as  the  purposeless  play  of  blind  material  atoms. 
And  when  it  does  this  it  commits  suicide.  When  mind  is  re- 
duced to  automatism,  schism  is  introduced  into  our  conscious 
life.  You  cannot,  as  Professor  Herbert  has  so  ably  shown, 
take  intentionality  out  of  matter  without  taking  it  out  of  mind. 
The  materialist  cannot  help  purposing;  he  cannot  help  believ- 
ing that  his  actions  are  the  realization  of  purpose ; and  yet  pur- 
pose is  a word  for  which  his  theory  of  the  universe  has  no  use 
and  which  it  cannot  explain.  “ Consistent  materialism,”  says 
Mr.  Green,  “ should  be  speechless.”  And  Mr.  Green  is  right. 
Consistent  materialism  is  egoism.  The  self  is  the  solitary 

tenant  of  a lone  universe.  It  has  no  logical  right  to  call  any 
other  self  its  companion,  for  of  that  other  self  it  has  no  knowl- 
edge. The  soul  is  a caged  bird.  It  is  the  function  of  a true 
theory  of  Knowing  and  Being  to  open  the  doors  of  that  gilded 
cage,  and  when  this  is  done,  with  little  help  from  us,  but  under 
the  irresistible  tendency  of  an  instinct  born  in  heaven,  this  poor, 
pining,  imprisoned  thing  will  fly  away  to  God. 

Nor  must  we  overlook  the  fact  that  the  atheism  of  to-day  is 
possessed  of  great  industry  and  intellectual  activity.  Remem- 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  121 


bcr  that  this  world  has  been  ruled  by  theistic  conceptions.  Its 
literature  has  been  written,  its  governments  maintained,  its 
social  institutions  established,  under  the  dominating  influence 
of  this  conception.  If  atheism  is  to  succeed  it  has  a great 
revolution  to  accomplish.  And  there  are  sad  indications  that 
the  men  who,  like  Professor  Clifford,  believe  that  the  “ great 
companion  is  dead  ” already  see  the  natural  consequences  of 
their  creed.  They  must  reconstruct  history  and  explain  the 
Bible  according  to  the  principles  of  naturalism.  They  must 
have  a system  of  criminal  jurisprudence  to  match  their  automa- 
tism. They  must  take  obligation  out  of  ethics  and  say  with 
Bentham  that  the  word  ought  ought  not  to  be  in  the  dictionary. 
Life  with  them  is  the  life  that  now  is,  and  it  is  a question 
whether  it  be  worth  living.  The  poor  man  will  make  the  best 
of  this  world,  and  as  matters  cannot  be  much  worse  he  will  take 
the  chances  of  socialism,  nihilism,  and  regicide.  The  man  of 
learned  leisure  will  look  out  of  despairing  eyes  upon  a world 
that  gives  no  pleasure  and  a future  that  has  no  hope.  Pessim- 
ism will  be  his  philosophy,  consentaneous  suicide  his  gospel  of 
peace  for  a suffering  world,  a “ calculus  of  hedonics,”  to  use  Mr. 
Sully’s  phrase,  that  shall  assure  him  of  a slight  surplus  of  pleas- 
ure over  pain,  the  one  mitigating  circumstance  in  the  discom- 
fort with  which  he  looks  upon  the  problem  of  life. 

Theism  on  its  philosophical  side  is  a theory  of  the  universe, 
but  on  the  side  of  our  religious  nature  it  is  belief  in  a Being 
whose  personality  is  set  over  against  our  personality — a Being 
upon  whom  we  are  dependent  and  to  whom  we  are  responsible. 
It  contains  materials,  therefore,  that  belong  also  to  the  depart- 
ment of  the  philosophy  of  religion ; and  yet  the  philosophy  of 
religion  is  a subject  that  especially  at  the  present  day  deserves 
separate  treatment  at  least  to  the  extent  of  what  Pfleiderer 
calls  the  psychology  of  religion.  This  is  a question  which  the 
evolutionists  should  not  monopolize;  for  if  religion  is  the  fruit 
of  fear  or  superstition,  or  be  a form  of  homage  to  dead  ances- 
tors, the  religious  feeling  cannot  be  an  ultimate  fact  irf  our 
nature,  and  cannot  be  appealed  to  in  support  of  doctrine.  We 
are  interested  as  Christians  in  showing  that  these  interpreta- 
tions of  religion  are  wrong.  And  conceding  even  that  the 


122 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  PIE  IP. 


religious  consciousness  is  an  ultimate  fact  in  our  nature,  or  that 
it  is  the  inspiration  of  the  Almighty  that  fills  us  with  the 
thoughts  of  the  Infinite  or  with  the  feelings  that  find  outlet  in 
prayer,  the  question  still  arises  whether  this  divine  influence 
ever  transcends  the  sphere  of  naturalism ; whether,  that  is  to 
say,  there  has  ever  been  such  an  interruption  of  the  uniformity 
of  nature  that  we  can  point  to  certain  exceptional  facts  and 
say  : “ These  are  special,  supernatural,  miraculous  exhibitions 
of  the  divine  presence.”  The  gravest  questions  are  involved  in 
this  inquiry.  If  with  Kuenen  and  Tiele  we  answer  No,  we 
must  conclude  that  our  Christian  religion  has  reached  its  purest 
form  through  successive  stages  not  of  progress  merely,  nor  of 
development  merely,  for  this  is  true,  but  of  a naturalistic  de- 
velopment— a development  which  compels  us  to  reconstruct 
history  so  as  to  show  that  the  religious  life  revealed  in  the  Bible 
has  in  all  its  phases  and  in  all  its  periods  been  conditioned  and 
determined  by  its  antecedents  and  environments.  If  the  essence 
of  religion  is  the  religious  feeling,  how  can  we  ever  get  out  of 
this  circle  of  subjectivity,  or  say  anything  else  of  Christianity 
than  that  it  is  one  of  the  forms  in  which  a universal  religious 
consciousness  has  been  exhibited  ? And  believing  that  Chris- 
tianity is  exclusive  and  is  entitled  to  paramount  authority,  we 
must  either  say  with  Mulford  that  Christianity  is  not  a religion, 
or  else  we  must  say  that  knowledge  as  well  as  feeling  enters 
into  its  essence.  Supernaturalism — I mean  Revelation — is  the 
condition  of  an  exclusive  Christianity,  and  it  is  an  important 
element  in  the  conservation  of  theism.  I am  far  fr.om  saying 
that  without  a revelation  there  can  be  no  religion  of  any  sort, 
and  I am  far  from  saying  that  without  a revelation  there  can 
be  no  knowledge  of  God.  But  when  men  give  up  revelation 
they  will  find  it  easier  to  give  up  theism.  This  is  not  reasoning 
in  a circle,  and  at  all  events  men  need  to  be  reminded  that  tho 
reasoning  in  a circle  may  not  be  good,  reasoning  in  straight 
lines  is  intolerably  bad.  Arguments  act  and  react  on  each 
other,  and  it  is  the  congruity  of  all  arguments  that  constitutes 
the  best  and  final  argument.  Pure  theism  is  not  the  solution 
of  the  world’s  problem.  The  man  who  has  given  up  Christianity 
is  on  the  road  to  atheism.  The  man  who  is  dissatisfied  with 


PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  THEOLOGICAL  CURRICULUM.  1 23 

the  Christian  religion  is  likely  to  find  himself  without  any 
religion  at  all ; and  the  logical  outcome  of  no  religion  is  no 
morality.  For  this  reason,  were  there  no  other,  the  discussion 
of  fundamental  ethics  should  have  a place  in  theological 
studies.  This,  as  we  have  been  recently  reminded,  is  just  now 
the  “ whereabouts  of  philosophical  activity”  (. Journal  of  Specula- 
tive Philosophy,  April,  1881).  The  question  in  ethics  is  the 
possibility  of  ethics.  The  question  of  the  hour  is  not  whether 
God  is  the  logical  correlative  of  our  consciousness  of  moral 
obligation ; nor  whether  happiness  or  holiness  is  the  chief  end 
of  man  ; nor  whether  conscience  is  intuitional  or  developed  out 
of  a “ strong  sense  of  avoidance.”  It  is  not  expressed  in  the 
utilitarianism  of  Mill,  nor  in  the  altruism  of  Spencer.  It  does 
not  reveal  itself  in  the  paradoxes  of  Sidgwick,  nor  in  the  tran- 
scendentalism of  Bradley.  It  is  the  question  whether  there  can 
be  any  guarantee  for  the  purity  of  home  or  the  stability  of  the 
social  organism  under  a philosophy  whieh  makes  man  an 
automaton.  Mr.  Frederic  Harrison  indicates  his  appreciation 
of  the  religious  problem  when  he  speaks  of  “ the  mighty  assize 
of  religions  which  this  generation  and  the  next  are  to  try  out  ” 
( Nineteenth  Century,  August,  1881).  He  is  right  in  supposing 
that  the  time  has  come  for  the  trial  of  the  issue.  We  have  had 
enough  of  demurrers  and  continuances ; enough  of  answers  and 
replications;  enough  of  rejoinders  and  surrejoinders.  The  time 
has  come  when  men  must  face  the  question  of  the  possibility  of 
morals.  They  must  decide  between  a metaphysic  that  leads  to 
an  absolute  vacuum  in  knowledge ; absolute  irresponsibility  in 
morals,  absolute  mechanism  in  life  ; and  a metaphysic  that  \vill 
secure  the  separateness,  the  sovereignty,  the  morality,  the  im- 
mortality of  the  soul.  With  the  soul  assured,  the  way  to  God 
is  plain.  If  God  is,  a revelation  of  God  may  be.  With  the 
possibility  of  revelation  conceded,  the  proof  is  sufficient.  And 
with  a proved  revelation  before  us,  it  is  easy  to  understand  that 
in  God  we  live  and  move  and  have  our  being ; that  the  path  of 
history  has  been  the  unfolding  of  his  purpose  ; that  the  order 
of  nature  is  the  movement  of  his  mind  ; that  the  work  of  the 
philosopher  is  to  rethink  his  thought  ; that  Christianity  is  the 
solution  of  all  problems ; that  the  blood  of  Christ  removes  the 


124 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


blot  of  sin  ; that  the  church  is  the  flower  of  humanity ; that 
the  Incarnation  of  the  Logos  is  God’s  great  achievement ; that 
Jesus  is  the  brightness  of  his  Father’s  glory  and  the  express 
image  of  his  person  ; that  in  him  are  hid  all  the  treasures  of 
wisdom  and  knowledge,  and  that  by  him  all  things  consist. 


Francis  L.  Patton.